Samsung Clx 8380nd User Manual

Using special copy features .................................................................................................................................... 5.4

ID card copying ................................................................................................................................................... 5.4

Copying ID with the manual ID copy option ........................................................................................................ 5.5

2-up or 4-up copying (N-up) ................................................................................................................................ 5.5

Poster copying .................................................................................................................................................... 5.6

Clone copying ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.6

Book copying ...................................................................................................................................................... 5.6

Booklet copying .................................................................................................................................................. 5.7

Cover copying ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.7

Transparency copying ........................................................................................................................................ 5.7

Erasing edges ..................................................................................................................................................... 5.7

Erasing background images ............................................................................................................................... 5.8

Shifting margins .................................................................................................................................................. 5.8

Gray enhance copying ........................................................................................................................................ 5.8

6. Faxing (Optional)

Preparing to fax ....................................................................................................................................................... 6.1

Understanding the Fax screen ................................................................................................................................ 6.1

Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 6.1

Advanced tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 6.2

Image tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 6.2

Sending a fax .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.2

Setting the fax header ......................................................................................................................................... 6.2

Sending a fax ...................................................................................................................................................... 6.2

Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial) .............................................................................................................. 6.3

Automatic resending ........................................................................................................................................... 6.3

Redialing the last number ................................................................................................................................... 6.3

Delaying a fax transmission ................................................................................................................................ 6.3

Sending a priority fax .......................................................................................................................................... 6.4

Receiving a fax ........................................................................................................................................................ 6.4

Changing the receive modes .............................................................................................................................. 6.4

Receiving manually in Telephone mode ............................................................................................................. 6.4

Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode ................................................................................. 6.4

Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone ................................................................................... 6.5

Receiving in secure receiving mode ................................................................................................................... 6.5

Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper ............................................................................................. 6.5

Receiving faxes in memory ................................................................................................................................. 6.5

Adjusting the document settings ............................................................................................................................. 6.5

Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................. 6.5

Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................... 6.6

Original Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 6.6

Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................. 6.6

Erase Background .............................................................................................................................................. 6.6

Color Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 6.6

Setting up a fax phonebook .................................................................................................................................... 6.6

Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.) ................................................................................................ 6.7

Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.) ............................................................................................................. 6.7

Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web Service ................................................................................. 6.7

Using the polling option ........................................................................................................................................... 6.8

Storing the originals for polling ........................................................................................................................... 6.8

Printing (Deleting) the polling document ............................................................................................................. 6.8

Polling a remote fax ............................................................................................................................................ 6.8

Polling from a remote Mailbox ............................................................................................................................ 6.8

Using Mailbox .......................................................................................................................................................... 6.9

Creating Mailbox ................................................................................................................................................. 6.9

Storing originals in Mailbox ................................................................................................................................. 6.9

Faxing to a remote Mailbox .............................................................................................................................. 6.10

Printing a report after sending a fax ...................................................................................................................... 6.10

Sending a fax in toll save time .............................................................................................................................. 6.10

Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job ..................................................................................................... 6.11

Forwarding a received fax to other destination ..................................................................................................... 6.11

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax .......................................................................................... 6.11

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax ................................................................................... 6.11

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email .................................................................................... 6.11

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email ............................................................................. 6.11

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server ........................................................................................ 6.12

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server ................................................................................ 6.12

Setting up the end fax tone ................................................................................................................................... 6.12

Setting up receiving faxes in color ........................................................................................................................ 6.12

7. Scanning

Understanding the Scan screen .............................................................................................................................. 7.1

Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 7.1

Advanced tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.2

Image tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 7.2

Output tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 7.2

User authentication for network scanning ............................................................................................................... 7.3

Registering local authorized users ...................................................................................................................... 7.3

Register authorized network users ..................................................................................................................... 7.3

Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email) .............................................................................. 7.4

Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment ....................................................... 7.4

Setting up an e-mail account .............................................................................................................................. 7.4

Storing email addresses ..................................................................................................................................... 7.5

Entering email addresses by the address book .................................................................................................. 7.5

Entering email addresses by the keyboard ......................................................................................................... 7.6

Scanning originals and sending via NetScan .......................................................................................................... 7.6

Preparation for network scanning ....................................................................................................................... 7.6

Scanning and sending via NetScan .................................................................................................................... 7.6

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server) ............................................................................ 7.7

Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP ................................................................................................................ 7.7

Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server ......................................................................................................... 7.7

Changing the scan feature settings ......................................................................................................................... 7.8

Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................. 7.8

Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................... 7.8

Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 7.8

Original Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.8

Color Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 7.8

Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................. 7.9

Erase Background .............................................................................................................................................. 7.9

Scan to Edge ...................................................................................................................................................... 7.9

Quality ................................................................................................................................................................. 7.9

Scan Preset ........................................................................................................................................................ 7.9

File Format .......................................................................................................................................................... 7.9

8. Basic printing

Printing a document ................................................................................................................................................ 8.1

Canceling a print job ............................................................................................................................................... 8.1

9. Using USB flash memory

About USB memory ................................................................................................................................................ 9.1

Understanding the USB screen ............................................................................................................................... 9.1

Plugging in an USB memory device ........................................................................................................................ 9.1

Scanning to an USB memory device ...................................................................................................................... 9.2

Scanning ............................................................................................................................................................. 9.2

Scan to USB ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.2

Basic tab ............................................................................................................................................................. 9.2

Advanced tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 9.2

Image tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 9.3

Output tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.3

Changing the scan feature settings ......................................................................................................................... 9.3

Duplex ................................................................................................................................................................. 9.3

Resolution ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.3

Original Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 9.3

Original Type ...................................................................................................................................................... 9.4

Color Mode ......................................................................................................................................................... 9.4

Darkness ............................................................................................................................................................. 9.4

Erase Background .............................................................................................................................................. 9.4

Scan to Edge ...................................................................................................................................................... 9.4

Quality ................................................................................................................................................................. 9.4

Scan Preset ........................................................................................................................................................ 9.4

File Format .......................................................................................................................................................... 9.5

File Policy ........................................................................................................................................................... 9.5

Printing from a USB memory device ....................................................................................................................... 9.5

To print a document from a USB memory device: .............................................................................................. 9.5

10. Machine status and advanced setup

Machine Setup ...................................................................................................................................................... 10.1

Machine Status screen ..................................................................................................................................... 10.1

Admin Setting screen ........................................................................................................................................ 10.1

Browsing the machine’s status .............................................................................................................................. 10.2

General settings .................................................................................................................................................... 10.2

Copy Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 10.4

Fax Setup .............................................................................................................................................................. 10.4

Network Setup ....................................................................................................................................................... 10.6

Authentication ....................................................................................................................................................... 10.6

Optional Service .................................................................................................................................................... 10.7

Adjusting the color contrast ................................................................................................................................... 10.8

Printing a report ..................................................................................................................................................... 10.9

11. Maintenance

Printing a machine report ...................................................................................................................................... 11.1

Monitoring the supplies life .................................................................................................................................... 11.1

Finding the serial number ...................................................................................................................................... 11.1

Sending the imaging unit reorder notification ........................................................................................................ 11.1

Sending the toner reorder notification ................................................................................................................... 11.2

Checking Stored Documents ................................................................................................................................ 11.2

Cleaning your machine ......................................................................................................................................... 11.2

Cleaning the outside ......................................................................................................................................... 11.2

Cleaning the inside ........................................................................................................................................... 11.2

Cleaning the scan unit ...................................................................................................................................... 11.2

Maintaining the toner cartridge .............................................................................................................................. 11.3

Toner cartridge storage .................................................................................................................................... 11.3

Expected cartridge life ...................................................................................................................................... 11.3

Redistributing toner ............................................................................................................................................... 11.3

Replacing the toner cartridge ................................................................................................................................ 11.4

Replacing the imaging unit .................................................................................................................................... 11.5

Replacing the waste toner container ..................................................................................................................... 11.7

Maintenance Parts ................................................................................................................................................ 11.8

Managing your machine from the website ............................................................................................................ 11.9

12. Troubleshooting

Tips for avoiding paper jams ................................................................................................................................. 12.1

Clearing document jams ....................................................................................................................................... 12.1

Misfeed of exiting paper .................................................................................................................................... 12.2

Roller misfeed ................................................................................................................................................... 12.2

Clearing paper jams .............................................................................................................................................. 12.3

In the tray 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 12.3

In the optional tray ............................................................................................................................................ 12.5

In the optional high capacity feeder .................................................................................................................. 12.6

In the multi-purpose tray ................................................................................................................................... 12.7

In the paper inside the machine ........................................................................................................................ 12.8

In the fuser area ................................................................................................................................................ 12.9

In the duplex unit area ...................................................................................................................................... 12.9

In the stacker (finisher) ................................................................................................................................... 12.10

Understanding display messages ....................................................................................................................... 12.11

Solving other problems ....................................................................................................................................... 12.15

Touch screen problem .................................................................................................................................... 12.15

Paper feeding problems .................................................................................................................................. 12.15

Printing problems ............................................................................................................................................ 12.15

Printing quality problems ................................................................................................................................ 12.17

Copying problems ........................................................................................................................................... 12.20

Scanning problems ......................................................................................................................................... 12.20

Network Scan problems .................................................................................................................................. 12.21

Fax problems (optional) .................................................................................................................................. 12.21

Common Windows problems .......................................................................................................................... 12.22

Common PostScript problems ........................................................................................................................ 12.22

Common Linux problems ................................................................................................................................ 12.23

Common Macintosh problems ........................................................................................................................ 12.25

13. Ordering supplies and accessories

Supplies ................................................................................................................................................................ 13.1

Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................... 13.1

How to purchase ................................................................................................................................................... 13.2

14. Installing accessories

Precautions to take when installing accessories ................................................................................................... 14.1

Installing a memory module .................................................................................................................................. 14.1

Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties ............................................................................... 14.2

Replacing the Stapler ............................................................................................................................................ 14.2

Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit ........................................................................................... 14.3

15. Specifications

General specifications ........................................................................................................................................... 15.1

Printer specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 15.2

Copier specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 15.2

Scanner specifications .......................................................................................................................................... 15.3

Facsimile specifications (optional) ........................................................................................................................ 15.3

16. Glossary

Index

About this user’s guide

Finding more information

This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the

machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual

usage. Both novice users and professional users can refer to this guide for

installing and using the machine.

You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the

following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.

Quick Install

Guide

Provides information on setting up your

machine and this requires that you follow

the instructions in the guide to prepare the

machine.

Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:

• Document is synonymous with original.

• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.

The following table offers the conventions of this guide:

Convention

Description

Example

Copy Setup

Bold

Used for texts on the

screen or actual prints on

the machine.

Online User’s

Guide

Provides you with step-by-step instructions

for using your machine’s full features, and

contains information for maintaining your

machine, troubleshooting, and installing

accessories.

Note

Used to provide

The date format

may differ from

country to country.

additional information or

detailed specification of

the machine function and

feature.

This user’s guide also contains Software

section to provide you with information on

how to print documents with your machine

in various operating systems, and how to

use the included software utilities.

Caution

Used to give users

information to protect the

machine from possible

mechanical damage or

malfunction.

Do not touch the

green underside of

the toner cartridge.

Printer Driver

Help

Provides you with help information on printer

driver properties and instructions for setting

up the properties for printing. To access a

printer driver help screen, click Help from

the printer properties dialog box.

a. pages per minute

Footnote

Used to provide more

detailed information on

certain words or a

phrase.

Used to show the steps

of selecting or pressing

items in order.

The example means;

press Copy from the

Main screen, press the

Advanced tab, and then

press Clone Copy.

Copy > the Advanced tab >

Clone Copy

Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get

help, support, printer drivers, manuals,

and order information from the Samsung

website, www.samsungprinter.com.

(See

Used to guide users to

the reference page for

the additional detailed

information.

(See page 1.1 for Special

features.)

page 1.1

for Special

features.)

Note

Items, features, options on the touch screen may differ between

models depending on their configurations.

14 Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions.

Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and may

require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the

machine to normal operation.

Safety and Regulatory Information

Important Precautions and Safety Information

15 Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a

remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the AC

power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.

When using this machine, these basic safety precautions should always be

followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock and injury to people:

Read and understand all instructions.

16 The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe

operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with 110 V

Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.

machine, then it should be 16 AWG or bigger.

Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the

literature accompanying the machine.

17 Use only No.26 AWG or larger telephone line cord.

If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information,

heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the

operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your

sales or service representative for assistance.

18 SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

Laser Safety Statement

Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack

before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only a damp

cloth for cleaning.

The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21

CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and elsewhere is

certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.

Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system

and printer are designed so there is never any human access to laser

radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or

prescribed service condition.

Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall,

causing serious damage.

Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator,

heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.

WARNING

Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine

where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.

Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from

Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can

damage your eyes.

Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish

performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.

When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be

followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:

10 Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface

cords.

11 Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or

cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points, creating a

risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the

machine.

12 To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine.

Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is required.

Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or

other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause electric shock when the

unit is subsequently used.

13 Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and

refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following

conditions:

• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is

damaged or frayed.

• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.

• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.

• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been

followed.

• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.

• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.

* AWG: American Wire Gauge

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

Ozone Safety

Power Saver

During normal operation, this machine produces ozone.

The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the

operator. However, it is advisable that the machine be

operated in a well ventilated area.

• This device may not cause harmful interference, and

• This device must accept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off

and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

If you need additional information about ozone, please

request your nearest Samsung dealer.

This printer contains advanced energy conservation

technology that reduces power consumption when it is

not in active use.

When the printer does not receive data for an extended

period of time, power consumption is automatically

lowered.

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are

registered U.S. marks.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

For more information on the ENERGY STAR program

see http://www.energystar.gov

• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.

Caution:

Recycling

Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer

responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this

product in an environmentally responsible manner.

Canadian Radio Interference Regulations

This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise

emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing

equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry

and Science Canada.

Correct Disposal of This Product (Waste Electrical

& Electronic Equipment)

Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques

applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme

sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par

l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.

(Applicable in the European Union and other European

countries with separate collection systems)

This marking shown on the product or its literature,

indicates that it should not be disposed with other

household wastes at the end of its working life. To prevent

possible harm to the environment or human health from

uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from

other types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote

the sustainable reuse of material resources.

Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this

product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they

can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.

Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and

conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed with

other commercial wastes for disposal.

Radio Frequency Emissions

FCC Information to the User

iii

• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone

line as your machine, you may experience transmission and reception

problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other

equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with your

machine.

Fax Branding

The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any

person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any message via

a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a

margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or on the first page of

the transmission the following information:

• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we

recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power and the

telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or

telephone and electronic specialty stores.

(1) the date and time of transmission

(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the

message; and

• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to

emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the

emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give

you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency number.

(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business

entity or individual.

The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities,

equipment operations or procedures where such action is reasonably

required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules

and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can be reasonably expected

to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone

company communications facilities, or require modification or alteration of

such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or

• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.

• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.

• You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by

means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.

performance, the customer shall be given adequate notice in writing, to allow

the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

Replacing the Fitted Plug (for UK Only)

Important

The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp

plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the fuse, you

must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover.

If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until you have another

fuse cover.

Ringer Equivalence Number

The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this

machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of the

machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the

telephone company.

Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.

The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load

placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether you have

“overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same

telephone line may result in problems making and receiving telephone calls,

especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence

Numbers of the equipment on your telephone line should be less than five in

order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases,

a sum of five may not be usable on your line. If any of your telephone

equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from

your telephone line, as it may cause harm to the telephone network.

The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be

suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have normal 13

amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove

the moulded plug.

Warning

If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.

You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you

plug it into a socket.

WARNING:

Important warning: You must earth this machine.

FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not

expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to

operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to

the telephone network, the telephone company should notify the customer

that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the

company may temporarily cease service, providing that they:

The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:

• Green and Yellow:

• Blue:

Earth

Neutral

Live

• Brown:

If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do

the following:

a) promptly notify the customer.

b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.

You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter

“E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or green.

c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal

Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in FCC Rules

and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.

You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N”

or colored black.

You should also know that:

You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L”

or colored red.

• Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.

You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.

software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL

Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

Declaration of Conformity (European Countries)

4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be

used to endorse or promote products derived from this software

without

5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact

[email protected].

6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"

nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written

permission of the OpenSSL Project.

Approvals and Certifications

The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes

Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity

with the following applicable 93/68/EEC Directives of the

European Union as of the dates indicated:

January 1, 1995: Council Directive 73/23/EEC Approximation of the laws of

the member states related to low voltage equipment.

7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the

OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://

www.openssl.org/)"

January 1, 1996: Council Directive 89/336/EEC (92/31/EEC), approximation

of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic compatibility.

March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and

telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of their

conformity.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS''

AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT

NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY

AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO

EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,

EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER

IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING

A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards

can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. representative.

EC Certification

Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications

Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)

This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European

single terminal connection to the analogue public switched telephone

network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has

been designed to work with the national PSTNs and compatible PBXs of the

European countries:

NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE

USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric

Young([email protected]). This product includes software written by

Tim Hudson ([email protected]).

In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung

Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.

The product has been tested against TS 103 021. To assist in the use and

application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the

European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an

advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional

requirements to ensure network compatibility of TS 103 021 terminals. The

product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the

relevant advisory notes contained in this document.

Original SSLeay License

reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young

([email protected]). The implementation was written so as to conform

with Netscapes SSL.

OpenSSL License

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as

the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to

all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc.,

code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this

distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the

holder is Tim Hudson ([email protected]). Copyright remains Eric

Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be

removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be

given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can

be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are

met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are

met:

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this

list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes

cryptographic software written by Eric Young ([email protected])"

The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library

being used are not cryptographic related:-).

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof)

from the apps directory (application code) you must include an

acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim

Hudson ([email protected])"

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED

TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT

SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF

USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER

CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE

OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be

copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU

Public Licence.]

Save time and money

• You can print multiple pages on one single sheet of

1Introduction

paper to save paper.

• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain

paper. See Software section.

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your

machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing functions.

• This machine automatically conserves electricity by

substantially reducing power consumption when not in

use.

This chapter includes:

•

Special features

Machine overview

Expand your machine’s capacity

Control panel overview

Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons

Understanding the Status LED

Menu map

• Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their

memory. (Page 14.1)

• A network interface enables network printing. Your

machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/

100 Base TX.

• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3

Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.

Note

Some features are optional. Please check the specifications

sections. (Page 15.1)

* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3

reserved. Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and

OneImage are trademarks of Zoran Corporation.

Special features

* 136 PS3 fonts

Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.

Your new machine is equipped with special features.

Print with excellent quality and speed

Print in various environments

• You can print in full range of colors using yellow,

• You can print with Windows 2000 and Windows XP/

2003/Vista as well as Linux and Macintosh systems.

• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a

network interface.

magenta, cyan, and black.

• You can print with a resolution of up to 9,600 x 600 dpi

effective output (600 x 600 x 4 dpi). See Software

section.

• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 38 ppm

and letter-sized paper at up to 40 ppm.

• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized

paper at up to 33 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to

35 ppm

Copy originals in several formats

• You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided

document production.

• There are special functions to erase punch holes,

staple marks and newspaper background.

• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and

enhance at the same time.

Handle different paper options with flexibility

• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes,

labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards,

and heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to

100 sheets of plain paper.

• The 520-sheet tray 1 and 520-sheet optional tray

support plain paper in various sizes.

• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper

in various sizes.

Scan the originals and send it right away

• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations

using, E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.

• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email

addresses and send the scanned image immediately.

• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of

JPEG, TIFF and PDF formats.

Create professional documents

• Print watermarks. You can customize your documents

with words, such as “Confidential”. See Software

section.

Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)

• You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and

also send the fax to several stored destinations.

• After the transmission, the machine may print out the

fax reports according to the setting.

• Print posters. The text and pictures of each page of

your document are magnified and printed across the

sheet of paper and can then be taped together to form

a poster. See Software section.

1.1

Introduction>

Use USB flash memory devices

If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in

various ways with your machine.

• You can scan documents and save them to the device.

• You can directly print data stored to the device.

• You can back up data and restore backup files to the

machine’s memory.

Machine features

The table below lists a general overview of features supported by your

machine.

( : Included, O: Optional )

Features

SCX-8380ND

USB 2.0

USB Memory

PostScript Emulation

DADF (Duplex Automatic

Document Feeder)

Hard Disk

Fax option kit

Optional tray 2/3

High Capacity Feeder

Stand

Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)

Staple Cartridge

FDI (Foreign Interface Device) kit

SmarThru Workflow

Network Interface

(Ethernet 10/100 Base TX)

Duplex printing

a. Printing on both sides of paper.

*.For ordering information for optionals. (Page 13.1)

1.2

Machine overview

These are the main components of your machine.

Front view

• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.

DADF cover

Stand

DADF document width guides

DADF document input tray

DADF document output tray

Scanner lid

CCD Lock

Output support

Multi-purpose tray extension

Multi-purpose tray paper width guides

Scanner glass

Control panel

Side cover

Transfer unit

Front cover

Toner cartridge

Multi-purpose tray

Imaging unit

Tray 1

Waste toner container

Optional tray

1.3

Rear view

• The symbol * is a mark for the optional device.

Finisher (Stacker & Stapler)

USB port

Finisher output tray (Stacker & Stapler)

Network port

Finisher cover (Stacker & Stapler)

Dummy for FDI (Foreign Device Interface)

USB memory port

15-pin Finisher connection (Stacker & Stapler)

Power switch

Extension telephone socket (EXT)

Telephone line socket (LINE)

Power receptacle

1.4

Control panel overview

Machine Setup: Leads you to the machine setup and

advanced settings. (Page 10.1)

On Hook Dial: Engages the telephone line.

Job Status: Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs

or completed jobs.

Interrupt: Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.

Status: Shows the status of your machine. (Page 1.7)

Clear All: Reverts the current settings to the default

values.

Display screen: Displays the current machine status and

prompts during an operation. You can set menus easily

using the touch screen.

Power Saver: Sends the machine into the power saver

mode. You can also turn the power on and off with this

button. (Page 3.6)

Numeric keypad: Dials fax number, and enters the number

value for document copies or other options.

Stop: Stops an operation at any time. The pop up window

appears on the screen showing the current job that the

user can stop or resume.

Clear: Deletes characters in the edit area.

Start: Starts a job.

Redial/Pause: In standby mode, redials the last number, or

in edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.

Caution

When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen may be damaged with a sharpen pen or anything else.

1.5

• Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their

status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.

Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons

• Usage Page Report:You can print the report on the amount of

printouts depending on the paper size and type.

Touch screen

The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once

Job Status button

you press the home icon (

) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.

When you press Job Status button, the screen shows the lists of

currently running jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.

•

: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature contents.

Copy: Enters the Copy menu.

Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)

•

Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.

Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.

Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.

No.: Gives the order of jobs.

Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.

Status: Gives the current status of each job.

User: Provides user name, mainly computer name.

Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type, recipient

phone number and other information.

Scan: Enters Scan to Email NetScan, Scan to Server menu.

Stored Documents: Enters the Stored Documents menu.

(Page 11.2)

•

USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on

your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.

SmarThru Workflow: Enters the SmarThru Workflow menu.

(Optional)

•

Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.

LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.

: You can change the display language.

•

Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the

Current Job Completed Job and Active Notice list.

•

Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.

Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.

Close: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.

: Guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the

machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only

when you connect an USB memory module.

•

Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.

Power Saver button

When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power

save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.

(Page 3.6)

Note

• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be

grayed out, depending on the optional kit or program installed

in your machine.

If you press Power Saver button for more than two seconds, a window appears,

requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is turned off.

This button can also be used to turn the button on.

• To switch the display screen and see other available icons,

press the right arrow on the display screen.

Status

Description

Machine Setup button

Off

• The machine is not in the power save mode.

• The machine is in the low power save mode.

When you press Machine Setup button, you can browse current

machine settings or change machine values. (Page 10.1)

Blue

The machine is in the power save mode.

Blink

The machine is in the ready power save mode.

Interrupt button

When you press Interrupt button, the machine goes into interrupt mode

which means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent

copy job completes, the previous printing job continues.

•

This button allows you to move to Copy, Fax, Scan, Stored

Documents menu directly.

Status

Description

• Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.

Off

The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.

The machine is in interrupt printing mode.

• Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.

Blue

1.6

Note

Menu map

Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the

machine is shut down or reset.

The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the

machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed

by pressing Machine Setup, Job Status or touching menus on the

display screen. Refer to the following diagram.

Understanding the Status LED

When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's

condition by the light color of it's action.

Main screen

The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel.

Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.

Status

Description

• The machine is off-line.

• The machine is in power save mode. When

data is received, or any button is pressed, it

switches to on-line automatically.

Copy

Fax (Optional)

Off

Basic tab (Page 5.1)

Original Size

Reduce/Enlarge

Duplex

Basic tab (Page 6.1)

Address

Duplex

Resolution

Output

Advanced tab (Page 6.2)

Original Size

Delay Send

Original Type

Color Mode

Darkness

Green On

The machine is on-line and can be used.

Priority Send

Polling

Mailbox

Paper Supply

Advanced tab (Page 5.1)

ID Copy

Blinking • When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine

is receiving data from the computer.

Image tab (Page 6.2)

Original Type

Darkness

N-Up

• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the machine

is printing data.

Poster Copy

Clone Copy

Book Copy

Erase Background

Color Mode

Booklet

Covers

Red

• The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan.

Remove the old imaging unit and install a new

one. (Page 11.5)

• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove

the old toner cartridge and install a new one.

(Page 11.4)

Transparencies

Image tab (Page 5.1)

Erase Edge

Erase Background

Margin Shift

Scan Enhance

• A paper jam has occurred. (Page 12.3)

• The cover is opened. Close the cover.

• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in

the tray.

• The machine has stopped due to a major

error. Check the display message.

(Page 12.11)

• The waste toner container not installated in

the machine, or full waste toner container.

(Page 11.7)

Stored Documents

Scan

Public tab (Page 11.2)

Scan to Email (Page 7.1)

Basic tab

Detail

Edit

Advanced tab

Image tab

Delete

Delete All

Output tab (Page 7.2)

NetScan

Secured tab (Page 11.2)

Basic tab (Page 7.1)

Advanced tab (Page 7.2)

Image tab (Page 7.2)

Output tab (Page 7.2)

Scan to Server

Detail

Edit

Delete

Basic tab (Page 7.2)

Advanced tab (Page 7.2)

Image tab (Page 7.2)

Output tab (Page 7.2)

Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine

is waiting the error to be cleared. Check the

display message. When the problem is

cleared, the machine resumes.

USB

USB Format

USB Print

Scan to USB

Basic tab

• The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.

Order a new toner cartridge. You can

temporarily improve print quality by

Advanced tab

Image tab

Output tab

redistributing the toner. (Page 11.4)

Note

Check the message on the display screen, and follow the

instruction on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part.

(Page 12.1) If the problem persists, call for service.

1.7

Admin Setting

Machine Setup button

When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the

screen displays three menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life,

billing, counters and reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced

setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page

Report can print the report on the amount of printouts depending on the

paper size and type.

General tab

Setup tab

(Page 10.2)

(Page 10.4)

Copy Setup

Fax Setup

Network Setup

Authentication

Optional Service

Color

Device Info

Date & Time

Default Settings

Measurement

Timers

Machine Status

Language

Power Saver

Tray Management

Altitude Adjustment

Output Options

Contention Management

Sound

Supplies Life tab

Machine Info. tab

(Page 10.1)

Machine Details

Toner Cartridge-C

Toner Cartridge-M

Toner Cartridge-Y

Toner Cartridge-K

Imaging Unit-C

Customer Support

Machine Serial Number

Hardware Options

Configuration

Supplies Management

Machine Test

On Demand Overwrite

HDD Spoolling

Stored Job File Policy

Country

Imaging Unit-M

Software Versions

Tray Status

Print/Report tab

Imaging Unit-Y

Imaging Unit-K

Tray

(Page 10.9)

Accounting Reports

Report

Fuser Kit

Status

Feed Roller Kit-Tray 1

Feed Roller Kit-Tray 2

Feed Roller Kit-Tray 3

Feed Roller Kit - Bypass Tray

Document Feeder Roller

BTR Kit

Paper Size

Paper Type

Print/Report

System Report

Scan Report

Fax Report

DADF Friction Pad Kit

Usage Counters

Usage Page Report

Total Impressions

Black Impressions

Black Copied Impressions

Black Printed Impressions

Color Impressions

Color Copied Impressions

Color Printed Impressions

Sheets

When the display “ Are you sure you want to print it” shows, press

Yes.

Job Status button

Copied Sheets

Color Copied Sheets

Printed Sheets

This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the

notice message such as an error. (Page 1.6)

Black Printed Sheets

Color Printed Sheets

2 Sided Sheets

Current Job tab

Completed Job tab

Copied 2 Sided Sheets

Black Copied 2-Sided Sheets

Color Copied 2-Sided Sheets

DADF Scan Page Counts

Platen Scan Page Counts

Printed 2 Sided Sheets

Black Printed 2-Sided Sheets

Color Printed 2-Sided Sheets

Analog Fax Sheets

Analog Fax 2-Sided Sheets

Fax Image Received

Analog Fax Images Sent

Analog Fax Images Received

Images Sent

Detail

Delete

Delete All

Active Notice tab

Detail

Network Scanning Images Sent

Email Images Sent

Maintenance Impressions

Black Maintenance Impressions

1.8

Printer

Contents

2Software overview

Linux

• Printer driver: Use this driver to run

your machine from a Linux computer

and print documents.

• SANE: Use this driver to scan

documents.

This chapter gives you an overview of the software that comes with your

machine. Further details how to use the software are explained in the

Software section.

software CD

(Continue)

This chapter includes:

• Smart Panel: This program allows

you to monitor the machine’s status

and alerts you when an error occurs

during printing.

•

Supplied software

Printer driver features

System requirements

Macintosh

• Printer driver: Use this file to run

your machine from a Macintosh

computer and print documents.

• Scan driver: TWAIN driver is

available for scanning documents on

your machine.

Supplied software

You must install the printer and scanner software using the supplied CD

after you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer.

• Smart Panel: This program allows

you to monitor the machine’s status

and alerts you when an error occurs

during printing.

This CD provides you with the following software:

Contents

Printer

software CD

Windows

• Printer driver: Use this driver to

take full advantage of your printer’s

features.

a. Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful image

editor and to send the image by email. You can also open another image editor

program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru. For details, please refer to the

onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru program.

• PostScript Printer Description

(PPD) file: Use the PostScript driver

to print documents with complex

fonts and graphics in the PS

language.

• Scanner driver: TWAIN and

Windows Image Acquisition (WIA)

drivers are available for scanning

documents on your machine.

• Smart Panel: This program allows

you to monitor the machine’s status

and alerts you when an error occurs

during printing.

• SmarThru Office : This is the

accompanying Windows-based

software for your multi-functional

machine.

• Network Scan: This program allows

you to scan a document on your

machine and save it to a network-

connected computer.

• Direct Printing Utility: This program

allows you to print PDF files directly.

•

SetIP: Use this program to set your

machine’s TCP/IP addresses.

2.1

Software overview>

Printer driver features

System requirements

Your printer drivers support the following standard features:

• Paper source selection

Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following

requirements:

• Paper size, orientation and media type

• Number of copies

Windows

Your machine supports the following Windows operating systems.

In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following

table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer

drivers:

Requirement (recommended)

Operating

Free disk

space

system

CPU

RAM

PCL 6

PostScript

Feature

Windows

2000

Pentium II 400 MHz

(Pentium III 933 MHz)

64 MB

(128 MB)

600 MB

Windows

Macintosh

Linux

Toner save

Pentium III 933 MHz

(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB

(256 MB)

1.5 GB

Windows XP

Print quality

option

Windows

2003 Server

Pentium III 933 MHz

(Pentium IV 1 GHz)

128 MB

(512 MB)

1.25 GB to

2 GB

Poster

printing

Windows

Vista

Pentium IV 3 GHz

512 MB

(1024 MB)

15 GB

Multiple

pages per

sheet (N-up)

(2, 4)

Windows

Server 2008

Pentinum IV 1 GHz

(Pentinum IV 2 GHz)

512 MB

(2048 MB)

10 GB

Fit to page

printing

Note

• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for

all Windows operating systems.

Scale printing

Different

source for

first page

• Users who have an administrator right can install the

software.

• Windows Terminal Service is compatible with this machine.

Watermark

Overlay

Macintosh

Requirement (recommended)

Operating

system

Duplex

Free

disk

space

CPU

RAM

Store Print

Delay Print

Spool Print

Proof Print

Stapler

• Intel Processor

• Power PC G4/ G5

• 128 MB for a

Power PC

1 GB

based Mac

(512 MB)

• 512 MB for a

Intel-based

Mac (1 GB)

Mac OS X 10.4

or lower

a. This feature is not supported MAC OS X 10.3.

b. The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.

• Intel Processor

512 MB (1 GB)

1 GB

Mac OS X 10.5 • 867 MHz or faster

Power PC G4/ G5

2.2

Software overview>

Linux

Item

Requirements

RedHat 8.0, 9.0 (32bit)

RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)

Fedora Core 1~7 (32/64bit)

Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)

Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007 (32/64bit)

SuSE Linux 8.2, 9.0, 9.1 (32bit)

Operating system

SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2 (32/64bit)

SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)

Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04 (32/64bit)

Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)

CPU

Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)

512 MB (1024 MB)

RAM

Free HDD space

1 GB (2GB)

Note

• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for

working with large scanned images.

• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at

maximum.

2.3

A horizontal plane must be within 5 mm (0.02 inches) both from front

to rear and from right to left.

3Getting Started

This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the

machine.

This chapter includes:

•

Setting up the hardware

Setting up the network

Installing the software

Using the SetIP program

Altitude adjustment

Machine's basic settings

Understanding the keyboard

Caution

• When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it up side

down, or the inside of the machine may be contaminated by

toner, which can cause damage to the printer or bad printing

quality.

Setting up the hardware

This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained

in Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and

complete following steps.

• If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a

long time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the

ready mode. Then close the scan lid and turn the power off.

And open the scan lid and lock the scanner lock.

Select a stable location.

Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation.

Allow extra space to open covers and trays. Under the altitude

1,000 m (3,281 ft) is effective for printing. See the general settings

for Altitude Adjustment in page 3.5.

Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.

Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.

Install both the toner cartridges and imaging units.

Load paper. (See page 4.7 for "Loading paper")

Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.

Turn the machine on.

The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or

sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to

the edge of your desk or table.

Setting up the network

You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your

network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the

machine's touch screen.

Note

If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a

computer and you machine. Refer to the software installation in

Software section.

3.1

Getting Started>

Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and

Gateway address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses

by number keypad on the control panel.

Supported operating systems

The following table shows the network environments supported by the

machine:

Item

Requirements

10/100 Base-TX

Network interface

Network operating

system

• Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista/2008

• Various Linux OS

• Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5

Network protocols

• TCP/IP on windows

• DHCP

Note

• BOOTP

Contact the network administrator, if you are not sure how to

configure.

Note

10 Press OK.

If you want to set up DHCP network protocol, go to http://

developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select the

Bonjour program that is appropriate for your computer operating

system and install the program. This program will allow you to set

network parameters automatically. Follow the instructions in the

installation window. This program does not support Linux.

Note

You can also set up the network settings through the network

administration programs.

•

SyncThru™ Web Admin Service: Web-based printer

management solution for network administrators. SyncThru™

Web Admin Service provides you with an efficient way of

managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and

troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate

internet access. Download this program from http://

solution.samsungprinter.com.

Configuring network protocol via the machine

You can setup TCP/IP Network parameters please follow the steps listed

below.

•

SyncThru™ Web Service: Web server embedded on your

network print server, which allows you to:

Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45

Ethernet cable.

- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine

to connect to various network environments.

Make sure you turned on the machine.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting.

- Customize email settings and set up address book for

scanning to email.

- Customize server settings and set up address book for

scanning to the FTP or SMB servers.

- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings.

When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the

password input area, then the question marks appears. Use the

number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Once

the password is entered, press OK. (Factory setting:1111)

•

SetIP: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface

and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/

IP protocol. See page 3.4 for "Using the SetIP program".

Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.

Select TCP/IP Protocol.

Installing the software

You have to install the machine software for printing and scanning. The

software includes drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.

Press IP Setting.

Note

• The following procedure is for when the machine is being used

as a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with

a USB cable, refer to Software section .

• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP

operating system. The procedure and popup window which

appears during the installation may differ depending on the

operating system, the printer feature, or the interface in use.

(See Software section.)

3.2

Getting Started>

Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed.

(Page 3.1) All applications should be closed on your computer

before beginning installation.

The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the

printer you want to install from the list and then click Next.

Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window

appears. Click Next.

• If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type

X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your

drive and click OK.

• If you use Windows Vista, click Start > All Programs >

Accessories > Run, and type X:\Setup.exe.

• If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click Run

Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and click Continue in

the User Account Control window.

Click Next.

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to refresh the

list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your printer to the network.

To add the printer to the network, enter the port name and the IP

address for the printer.

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a

Network Configuration page. (See page 11.1 for "Printing a

machine report")

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared

Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a

shared printer by clicking the Browse button.

Note

• If you are not sure of IP address, contact your network

administrator or print network information. (See

page 11.1 for "Printing a machine report")

• If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off

the firewall and click Update.

• Select a language from the drop-down list, if necessary.

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to

print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung

printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so

desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.

Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click

Next.

Note

• If your printer does not work properly after the installation, try

to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.

• During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer

detects the location information for your operating system and

sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a

different Windows location, you must change the paper size to

match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to

change the paper size after installation is complete.

3.3

Note

Using the SetIP program

If you do not know the network interface's MAC address,

print the machine's network information report. (See

page 11.1 for "Printing a machine report")

This program is for the network IP setting using the MAC address which

is the hardware serial number of the network printer card or interface.

Especially, it is for the network administrator to set several network IPs at

the same time.

Click OK to confirm the settings.

Click Exit to close the SetIP program.

The following procedure is based on windows XP. If you use Macintosh

or Linux OS, see Software section.

Note

• You can only use SetIP program when your machine is

connected to a network.

• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP

operating system. If you are using Macintosh or Linux, See

Software section.

• If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to

setup a DHCP network protocol, go to the http://

developer.apple.com/networking/bonjour/download/, select

the program Bonjour for Windows due to your computer

operating system, and install the program. This program will

allow you to fix the network parameter automatically. Follow

the instruction in the installation window. This Bonjour

program does not support Linux

Installing the program

Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the

driver CD runs automatically, close the window.

Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents your

CD-ROM drive.)

Double click Application > SetIP.

Open the folder of the language you plan to use.

Double click Setup.exe to install this program.

Follow the instructions in the window and complete the installation.

Starting the program

From the Windows Start menu, select Programs > Samsung

Network Printer Utilities > SetIP.

Select the name of your printer and click

Note

If you cannot find your printer name, click

list.

to refresh the

Enter the network interface's MAC address, IP address, subnet

mask, default gateway, and then click Apply.

3.4

Altitude adjustment

Machine's basic settings

The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined

by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information

will guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best

quality of print.

After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default

settings. Check the next explanation if you would like to set or change

values.

Setting the authentication password

Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the

machine.

To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To

change password, follow the next steps.

Value

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

High 3

Press Admin Setting.

When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the

password input area, then the question marks appears, use the

number keypad on the control panel to enter the password. Then,

press OK. (Factory setting:1111)

High 2

High 1

Press the Setup tab > Authentication.

Press Change Admin. Password

Normal

Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the General tab.

Press Altitude Adjustment.

Select appropriate option, and then click OK.

Note

Press OK.

Setting the date and time

When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay

Print, also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct,

you need to change it for correct time being.

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and

click Go to access the web site of your machine. Click Machine

Settings > Setup (or Machine Setup) > Altitude Adj. Select

the appropriate altitude value, and then click Apply.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date&Time.

Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area

and use the numeric keypad on the control panel.

Press OK.

Note

To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and

Time Format.

3.5

Select appropriate option and time.

Changing the display language

To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following

steps.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the General tab.

• Low Power Save: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under

100 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan

for the fuser unit.

Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.

Select the desired language.

• Power Save: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after

certain time.

Press OK.

Setting job timeout

Setting the default tray and paper

When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the

current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.

You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing

job. (Page 10.2)

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the General tab.

Press Timers.

Press the General tab.

Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray

Management.

Select System Timeout.

Select On.

Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.

Select a duration using left/right arrows.

Press OK.

Note

If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen

is grayed out.

Using power saving feature

The machine provides power saving features.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Changing the default settings

Press Admin Setting.

You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at

once.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press the General tab.

Press Admin Setting.

Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.

3.6

Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.

Understanding the keyboard

You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using

the keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged

like a normal keyboard for better usability for the user.

Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the

keyboard pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default

showing the lowercase letters.

For example, if you want to change the default setting of the

brightness & darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and

adjust the brightness & darkness.

Press OK.

Changing the font setting

Your machine has preset the font for your region or country.

: Moves the cursor between characters in the input area.

Backspace: Deletes the character on the left side of the cursor.

Delete: Deletes the character on the right side of the cursor.

Clear: Deletes all characters in the input area.

If you want to change the font or set the font for special condition such as

the DOS environment, you can change the font setting as follows:

Ensure that you have installed the printer driver from the provided

software CD.

Double-click the Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (or

Notification Area in Linux). You can also click Smart Panel on the

status bar in Mac OS X.

Input area: Enters letters within this line.

Shift: Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase keys or

vice versa.

Click Printer Setting.

Symbols: Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the

symbol keyboard.

If your machine is connected to a network, SyncThru Web Service

screen appears automatically.

Space: Enters a blank between characters.

OK: Saves and closes input result.

Click Machine Settings.

Cancel: Cancels and closes input result.

Click PCL.

Select your preferred font in the Symbol set list.

Click Apply.

Note

Following information shows the proper font list for

corresponding languages.

• Russian: CP866, ISO 8859/5 Latin Cyrillic

• Hebrew: Hebrew 15Q, Hebrew-8, Hebrew-7 (Israel only)

• Greek: ISO 8859/7 Latin Greek, PC-8 Latin/Greek

• Arabic & Farsi: HP Arabic-8, Windows Arabic, Code Page 864,

Farsi, ISO 8859/6 Latin Arabic

• OCR : OCR-A, OCR-B

3.7

Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with

the registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.

4Loading originals and print

media

This chapter introduces you how to load originals and print media into

your machine.

This chapter includes:

•

Loading originals

Selecting print media

Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray

Loading paper

Setting the paper size and type

Loading originals

You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,

scanning, and sending a fax.

Close the scanner lid.

Note

• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy

quality and toner consumption.

On the scanner glass

Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in

the DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner

glass. To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled

images, use the scanner glass.

• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the

printout. Always keep it clean. (Page 11.2)

• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the

scanner lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then

close the lid. If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm,

start copying with the lid open.

Lift and open the scanner lid.

In the DADF

Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of 75 g/m (20 lb bond)

paper for one job.

When you use the DADF:

• Do not load paper smaller than 69(W) x 145(L) mm (2.7 x 5.7 inches)

or larger than 216(W) x 356(L) mm (8.5 x 14 inches).

• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:

- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper

- coated paper

- onion skin or thin paper

- wrinkled or creased paper

- curled or rolled paper

- torn paper

• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.

• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely

dry before loading.

• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.

• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents

having other unusual characteristics.

4.1

Loading originals and print media>

To load an original into the DADF:

Selecting print media

Flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to separate the pages before

loading originals.

You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,

labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the

guidelines for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the

guidelines outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:

• Poor print quality

• Increased paper jams

• Premature wear on the machine.

Load the originals face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom

of the original stack matches the paper size marked on the

document input tray.

Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are

important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output

quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:

• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are

described later in this section.

• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate

for your project.

• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce

sharper, more vibrant images.

• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how

crisp the printing looks on the paper.

Note

• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section

and still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result

of improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity

levels, or other variables over which Samsung has no control.

• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that it

meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.

Adjust the document width guides to the paper size.

Caution

Using print media that does not meet these specifications may

cause problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered

by Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.

Caution

Dust on the DADF glass may cause black streaks on the

printout. Always keep it clean.

4.2

Loading originals and print media>

Specification on print media

Type

Plain paper

Size

Dimensions

Weight

• 60 to 90 g/m²(16 to 24 lb

bond) for the tray1.

• 60 to 90 g/m²(16 to 24 lb

bond) for the multi-purpose

tray

• 60 to 90 g/m²(16 to 24 lb

bond) for the high capacity

feeder

Capacity

• 520 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lb

bond) paper for the tray1

Letter

Legal

US Folio

216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches)

216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)

210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)

216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)

182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)

176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)

184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)

148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)

140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)

105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)

98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)

105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)

98 x 225 mm (3.87 x 8.87 inches)

110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)

162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)

114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)

92 x 165 mm (3.62 x 6.5 inches)

Refer to the Plain paper section

• 100 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lb

bond) in the multi-purpose

tray

• 2,100 sheets of 80 g/m

(20 lb bond) in the high

Oficio

JIS B5

ISO B5

capacity feeder

Executive

Statement

• 50 sheets of 80 g/m²(20 lb)

paper for the tray1

• 10 sheets of 80 g/m²(20 lb)

in the multi-purpose tray

Envelope

Envelope Monarch

Envelope No. 10

Envelope No. 9

Envelope DL

Envelope C5

Envelope C6

Envelope C6 3/4

Letter, A4, Oficio

75 to 90 g/m²(20 to 24 lb

bond)

• 100 sheets of 80 g/m²

(20 lb) paper for the tray1

Transparency

Labels

138 to 146 g/m²(37 to 39 lb

bond)

• 20 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)

in the multi-purpose tray

• 100 sheets of 80 g/m²

(20 lb) paper for the tray1

• 10 sheets of 80 g/m²(20 lb)

in the multi-purpose tray

Letter, Legal, US

Folio, A4, JIS B5,

ISO B5, Executive,

A5, Statement

Refer to the Plain paper section

120 to 150 g/m²(32 to 40 lb

bond)

• 90 to 163 g/m²(24 to 43 lb • 50 sheets of 80 g/m²(20 lb)

paper for the tray1

• 90 to 220 g/m²(24 to 58 lb • 10 sheets of 80 g/m²(20 lb)

Card stock

Letter, Legal, US

Folio, A4, JIS B5,

ISO B5, Executive,

A5, Statement, Post

Card 4x6

bond) for the tray1.

bond) for the multi-purpose

tray

in the multi-purpose tray

Minimum size (custom)

Maximum size (custom)

98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches)

216 x 900 mm (8.5 x 35.43 inches)

60 to 220 g/m²(16 to 58 lb bond)

a. Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.

b. High capacity feeder is not supported A6.

4.3

Guidelines for special print media

Media sizes supported in each mode

Media type

Guidelines

Mode

Size

Source

Envelopes

• Successful printing on envelopes depends upon

the quality of the envelopes. When selecting

envelopes, consider the following factors:

- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper

should not exceed 90 g/m²(20 to 24 lb bond) or

jamming may occur.

Copy mode

Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, • Tray 1

Oficio, Executive, ISO

B5, A5

• Optional tray

• Multi-purpose tray

• High capacity feeder

- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes

should lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and

should not contain air.

- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,

nicked, or otherwise damaged.

- Temperature: You should use envelopes that

are compatible with the heat and pressure of

the machine during operation.

Single side

printing

All sizes supported by • Tray 1

the machine

• Optional tray

• Multi-purpose tray

• High capacity feeder

Duplex printing

Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, • Tray 1

Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5,

Statement

• Optional tray

• Multi-purpose tray

• High capacity feeder

• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp

and well creased folds.

• Do not use stamped envelopes.

Fax mode

Letter, A4, Legal

• Ttray 1

• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps,

windows, coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or

other synthetic materials.

• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.

• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope

extends all the way to the corner of the

envelope.

• Optional tray

• High capacity feeder

a. 75 to 90 g/m²(20 to 24 lb bond) only

b. Only the optional fax kit is installed.

Guidelines for selecting and storing print media

When selecting or loading paper, envelopes, or other print materials,

keep these guidelines in mind:

• Always use print media that conform with the specifications listed on

page 4.3.

Acceptable

• Attempting to print on damp, curled, wrinkled, or torn paper can cause

paper jams and poor print quality.

• For the best print quality, use only high quality copier grade paper

specifically recommended for use in laser printers.

• Avoid using the following media types:

Unacceptable

- Paper with embossed lettering, perforations, or a texture that is too

smooth or too rough

- Erasable bond paper

- Multi-paged paper

- Synthetic paper and thermally reactive paper

- Carbonless paper and Tracing paper.

• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with

more than one flap that folds over to seal must

use adhesives compatible with the printer’s

fusing temperature for 0.1 second. Check your

machine’s specification to view the fusing

temperature, see page 15.1. The extra flaps and

strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams,

and may even damage the fuser.

• For the best print quality, position margins no

closer than 15 mm from the edges of the

envelope.

• Avoid printing over the area where the

envelope’s seams meet.

Use of these types of paper could result in paper jams, chemical

smells, and damage to your machine.

• Store print media in its ream wrapper until you are ready to use it.

Place cartons on pallets or shelves, not on the floor. Do not place

heavy objects on top of the paper, whether it is packaged or

unpackaged. Keep it away from moisture or other conditions that can

cause it to wrinkle or curl.

• Store unused print media at temperatures between 15 °C and 30 °C.

The relative humidity should be between 10% and 70%.

• Store unused print media in a moisture-proof wrap, such as a plastic

container or bag, to prevent dust and moisture from contaminating

your paper.

• Load special media types one sheet at a time through the multi-

purpose tray to avoid paper jams.

• To prevent print media, such as transparencies and label sheets, from

sticking together, remove them as they print out.

4.4

Media type

Guidelines

Media type

Labels

Guidelines

Transparencies • To avoid damaging the machine, use only

transparencies designed for use in laser printers.

• Transparencies used in the printer must be able

to withstand the machine’s fusing temperature.

Check your machine’s specification to view the

fusing temperature, see page 15.1.

• To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels

designed for use in laser printers.

• When selecting labels, consider the following

factors:

- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be

stable at your machine’s fusing temperature.

Check your machine’s specification to view the

• Place them on a flat surface after removing them

from the machine.

fusing temperature, see page 15.1

- Arrangement: Only use labels with no

exposed backing between them. Labels can

peel off sheets that have spaces between the

labels, causing serious jams.

- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with

no more than 13 mm ( 5 inches) of curl in any

direction.

• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long

periods of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate

on them, resulting in spotty printing.

• To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints,

handle them carefully.

• To avoid fading, do not expose printed

transparencies to prolonged sunlight.

- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles,

bubbles, or other indications of separation.

• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive

material between labels. Exposed areas can

cause labels to peel off during printing, which

can cause paper jams. Exposed adhesive can

also cause damage to machine components.

• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine

more than once. The adhesive backing is

designed for only a single pass through the

machine.

• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled,

curled, or have any torn edges.

Caution

• Recommended media: Transparency for

a Color Laser Printers produced by HP,

Xerox and 3M.

• It is not recommended to use

paperbacked transparencies such as

Xerox 3R91334, which can cause a jam

or be scratched.

• Do not use labels that are separating from the

backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or

otherwise damaged.

Card stock or

custom-sized

materials

Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm (3.86

inches) wide or 148 mm (5.83 inches) long.

• In the software application, set margins at least

6.4 mm (0.25 inches) away from the edges of

the material.

Preprinted

paper

• Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant

ink that will not melt, vaporize, or release

hazardous emissions when subjected to the

printer’s fusing temperature for 0.1 second.

Check your machine’s specification to view the

fusing temperature, see page 15.1.

• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and

should not adversely affect printer rollers.

• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a

moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes

during storage.

• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms

and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is

dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come

off preprinted paper, reducing print quality.

Note

Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause

problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by

Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.

4.5

After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width

guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly

touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to

the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.

Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray

To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to

adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.

paper length guide

paper width guide

Note

If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to

Quick Install Sheet to adjust paper size.

Note

Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is

preset to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load

another size, hold the lever and move the length guide to the

corresponding position.

• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the

materials to warp.

• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper

jams.

4.6

After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width

guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly

touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to

the edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.

Loading paper

Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional

high capacity feeder

Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the

tray 1. The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 520 sheets of 80 g/m (20 lb

bond) plain paper.

You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray

to load an additional 520 sheets of paper. (Page 13.1)

To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the

side you want to print facing up.

Note

• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the materials

to warp.

• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper jams.

After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray. See

page 4.9 for copying and faxing or Software section for PC-

printing.

Note

Place the side to be printed facing up.

Note

Preprinted paper

Envelope

Punched paper

Label

Transparency

If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a

time in the multi-purpose tray.

Card stock

Letterhead paper

4.7

In the multi-purpose tray

Load the paper with the side to be printed on facing down.

The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,

such as transparencies, postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful

for single page printing on letterhead or colored paper.

Tips on using the multi-purpose tray

• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.

• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in

the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print media.

• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into

the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.

• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and

print quality problems. (Page 4.2)

• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading

them into the multi-purpose tray.

To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:

Note

Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray

extension, as shown.

Place the side to be printed facing down.

Preprinted paper

Envelope

Punched paper

Label

Transparency

Card stock

Letterhead paper

Banner paper

If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to

separate the pages before loading.

Make sure you load one sheet at a time,

and hold the paper with two hands for

the paper not to fall since the paper

length is longer than the multi-tray

length.

For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the

print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.

4.8

Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them

to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be

bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.

Setting the paper size and type

After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and

type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.

For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the

application program you use on your PC. (See Software section.)

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the General tab.

Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray

Management.

Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.

After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-

purpose tray. See page 4.9 for copying and faxing or the Software

section for PC-printing.

Press OK.

Note

If you want to use special sized paper such as a billing paper, select

Custom in the Paper tab in the printer propeties. See Software

Note

The settings made from the printer driver override the

settings on the control panel.

section

After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the

multi-purpose tray.

4.9

• Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is

easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark

images. (Page 5.4)

5Copying

• Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.

This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy

machine.

Advanced tab

This chapter includes:

•

Understanding the Copy screen

Copying originals

Changing the settings for each copy

Using special copy features

Understanding the Copy screen

When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Ready To Copy screen

appears which has several tabs and lots of copying options. All the

options are grouped by features so that you can configure your selections

easily.

• ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This

feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a

business card. (Page 5.4)

• N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of

paper. (Page 5.5)

If the screen displays an other menu, press (

screen.

) to go to the Main

• Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages.

(Page 5.6)

Basic tab

• Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original

document on a single page. (Page 5.6)

• Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (Page 5.6)

• Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided

or 2-sided originals. (Page 5.7)

• Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock

taken from a different tray. (Page 5.7)

• Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between

transparencies within a set. (Page 5.7)

• Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (Page 5.2)

Image tab

• Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.

(Page 5.3)

• Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the

paper. (Page 5.3)

• Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you

install the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option

appears. (Page 5.4)

• Text, Text/Photo, Photo, Magazine: Improves the copy quality by

selecting the document type for the current copy job. (Page 5.4)

• Color, B/W, Auto: You can switch this mode among color, back/

white and automatic mode. Select whether the user print copies in

mono or color. If you select the Auto mode, the machine detects

the original document and decide the output is colored or not. In

this case, the copying speed will be reduced.

• Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and

fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (Page 5.7)

• Erase Background: Prints an image with no background.

(Page 5.8)

• Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document.

(Page 5.8)

Note

• When Auto mode is used, there maybe some orginals for

which the mode is not correctly switched between in color and

black/white. In this case, select Color or B/W manually as

appropriate to the original.

• Scan Enhance: Use this feature for the better quality of copy-

output. (Page 5.8)

5.1

Copying>

Copying originals

Changing the settings for each copy

This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.

On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features

before starting to copy.

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Note

Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document face down.

The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the

setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the

current copy job, the machine automatically restores the default

settings after certain time. Or the machine resume to default

setting when you press the Clear All button on the control panel

or when you press other menu such as fax or else except the

Job Status screen.

The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting.

(Page 10.2)

Changing the size of originals

Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the

original size.

Press more to see the detail values.

Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/

Enlarge, Duplex and more. (Page 5.2, Page 5.3)

• Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the

cardinal point arrows to set the size.

• Auto (DADF only): Automatically detects the size of originals, but

this option supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5

sized. If the originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the

largest original size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.

Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.

• Mixed Size (Letter & Legal) (DADF only): Allows for the use of

both of Letter and Legal sized papers together, and the machine

uses the proper-sized paper from several trays. For example, if the

originals are total 3 pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd

page is the legal-sized paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized

paper, then the machine prints the output first letter, legal, and

letter in order from several trays.

• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used

values.

Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Note

To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel.

Or you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status

on the control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and

press Delete.

5.2

Copying>

• 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and

prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back

side of the print out is rotated 180°.

Reducing or enlarging copies

Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to

reduce or enlarge an image on the paper.

Press more to see the values.

• 2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of

one on a separate sheet.

• 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both

sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print

out from the originals.

• Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.

• Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the

output paper.

• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used

values.

Note

• 2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and

prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the

back side of the printout is rotated 180 degree.

The Custom option is different depending on where the

originals is placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is

possible. And in the scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is

possible.

Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)

• Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both

sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of

the originals. The machine prints the second original first, which

means the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a

paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every

even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side

of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be

printed on the back side of a paper.

Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex

value.

Note

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both

sides of original, the message Another Page? appears after

the first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other

side facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts

scanning the second page of your original.

Press more to see the detail values.

• 1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side

of the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from

originals.

• Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Sided2: Scans originals and prints

them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print

out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original

first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back

side of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers,

every even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front

side of a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be

printed on the back side of a paper. The information on the back

side of the print out is rotated 180 degree.

• 1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both

sides of the paper.

5.3

• Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints

them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print

out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of

originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on

the back side of a paper.

Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.

• Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.

• Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.

• Photo: Use when originals are photographs.

• Magazine: Use when originals are magazines.

Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)

Changing the darkness

Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated or

Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.

This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the

level of light/dark in the printouts.

Note

If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both

sides of original, the message Another Page? appears after the

first page copied. At this time, load the original’s the other side

facing down and press Yes, then the machine starts scanning

the second page of your original.

Press more to see the values.

Using special copy features

• Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.

On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can

select specific copy features.

ID card copying

• Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.

The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper

and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the

original. This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a

business card.

• Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-

oriented output.

• Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscape-

oriented output.

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this

feature.

Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass

where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.

Note

The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker &

stapler. (Page 13.1)

Selecting the type of originals

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.

5.4

• Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page.

(select number 4.)

Press Start on the control panel.

Then the machine starts scanning the front side.

• Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are

on. If you choose to copy four images, you have to select four

positions here.

Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where

arrows indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.

• First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm

• Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm,

RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm

• Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm

• Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,

BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Note

If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1

Sided.

Copying ID with the manual ID copy option

If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying

position of the page, follow the next steps.

Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the

template list table.

Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license

cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.

Press

and select Copy.

Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Mamual ID Copy Setup.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then

enter password and press OK.

11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the

instruction on display to finish the ID copy for four images.

Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Mamual ID Copy Setup.

Press the number from the template list table.

Press Edit Template.

2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)

Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.

The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4

pages onto one sheet of paper.

• Template Name: Enter the template name.

• Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select

the largest scanning position out of the originals.

LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y-

090mm

2-up copying

4-up copying

Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Select the tray in Paper Supply.

Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.

Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.

• Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.

• 2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.

• 4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.

Press Start on the control panel.

5.5

The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The

number of images is automatically determined by the original image and

the paper size.

Note

You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for

the N-Up feature.

Poster copying

Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed

pages together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is

available only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each

portion is scanned and printed on by one in the following order.

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass in order to

use this feature.

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Select the tray in Paper Supply.

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use

this feature.

If this option is grayed out, select following options in the

Basic tab to activate it;

Press Copy from the Main screen.

- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided

- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)

- Paper Supply to Tray.

Select the tray in Paper Supply.

Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.

Press On to activate this feature.

Press OK.

Note

If this option is grayed out, select following options in the

Basic tab to activate it;

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

- Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided

- Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)

- Paper Supply to Tray.

Book copying

Use this feature to copy a book. If the book or magazine is thicker than

30 mm (1.18 inches), start copying with the scanner lid open.

Press On to activate this feature.

Press OK.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Note

Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned

and printed one by one in the following order:

Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Note

The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use

this feature.

Clone copying

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.

5.6

Select the tray in Paper Supply.

Note

To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab >

Erase Edge > Book Center and Edge Erase.

Press the Advanced tab > Covers.

Note

Select the binding option.

Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you

cannot use this feature.

• Off: Disables this feature.

• Left Page: Prints left page of the book.

• Right Page: Prints right page of the book.

• Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.

Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each

option.

• Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front,

back, or both.

Press OK.

• Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or

blank paper.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

• Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is

loaded.

Booklet copying

Press OK.

The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper, which

are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in the correct

sequence.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each

image to fit on the selected paper.

Transparency copying

When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to

copy the information.

Note

Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types

and Paper Size to Transparency.(Page 4.9)

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Select the tray in Paper Supply.

Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.

Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.

Set the paper type to Transparency.

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.

Select Transparencies option.

Press On to activate this feature, and select detailed settings for

each option.

• No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between

• 1 Sided Original: Copys on one side of the paper.

transparencies.

• 2 Sided Original: Copys on both sides of the paper.

• Blank Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.

Press OK.

• Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as

printed on the transparency.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or

Printed Sheet.

Note

This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio,

JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.

Press OK.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Cover copying

Erasing edges

The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock

taken from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation

as the main body of the job.

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Press Copy from the Main screen.

5.7

Copying>

You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.

You can copy the original without any edges or margins.

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.

Press the Image tab > Margin Shift

Select the appropriate option.

Select Margin Shift option.

• Off: Disables this feature.

• Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.

• Auto Center: Automatically centers of the paper copy. The original

must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This

option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.

• Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the

copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use

this feature.

• Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and

bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the

scanner glass or in DADF.

• Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of

the copies.

• Book Center and Edge Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or

book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This

feature only applies when you do copying a book. (Page 5.6)

Press OK.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Note

Gray enhance copying

If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use

Book Center and Edge Erase.

When you copy the original in gray scale, use this feature for the better

quality of copy-output. This feature is only for the copy in gray scale.

Press OK.

Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the

originals face up in the DADF. (Page 4.1)

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Press the Image tab > Scan Enhance.

Press On to activate this feature.

Press OK .

Erasing background images

This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the

background, as in newspapers or catalogs.

Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying

Press Copy from the Main screen.

Press the Image tab > Erase Background.

• Off: Disables this feature.

• Auto: Optimizes the background.

•

Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background is.

• Erase : The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.

Press OK.

Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.

Shifting margins

5.8

Preparing to fax

6Faxing (Optional)

Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line

cord to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a

connection. The method of making a telephone connection is varies from

one country to another.

This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax

machine.

This chapter includes:

•

Preparing to fax

Note

Understanding the Fax screen

Sending a fax

If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option

lists (Page 13.1) and contact the purchasing point to order.

When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the steps

described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the

kit. After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature.

(Page 14.3)

Receiving a fax

Adjusting the document settings

Setting up a fax phonebook

Using the polling option

Using Mailbox

Printing a report after sending a fax

Sending a fax in toll save time

Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job

Forwarding a received fax to other destination

Setting up the end fax tone

Setting up receiving faxes in color

Understanding the Fax screen

To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen

displays an other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

Note

• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services

(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting

telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services

(DSL, ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by

using the Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary

noise signals and improves connection quality or Internet

quality. Since the DSL Micro-filter is not provided with the

machine, contact your Internet Service provider for use on DSL

Micro-filter.

Note

If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not

appear on the Main screen.

Line port

Micro filter

Basic tab

DSL modem /

Telephone line

• To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on

the control panel and Admin Setting > Setup > Fax Setup.

(Page 10.4)

• Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using

the number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the

phone book, press Individual or Group. (Page 6.6)

• Add No: Lets you add more destinations.

•

: Deletes the last digit entered.

: Removes all digits of the selected entry.

• Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.

• Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.

6.1

• Address: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from

your machine or from SyncThru Web Service. (Page 6.7)

Sending a fax

• Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the

original, both sides of the original.

This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of

transmission.

• Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.

Note

When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or

the scanner glass. (Page 4.1) If the originals are placed on both

the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will read the

originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in

scanning.

Advanced tab

Setting the fax header

In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number

on any fax you send.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

• Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK

to update current setting.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

• Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without

your intervention. (Page 6.3)

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.

• Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.

(Page 6.4)

Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax

number.

• Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be

faxed remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use

the polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the

machine. (Page 6.8)

Press OK.

Sending a fax

• Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine

memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on

the same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine.

Each mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and

password. (Page 6.9)

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Place the originals face up in the DADF.

• Back: Returns to the Basic tab.

Image tab

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

• Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the

original document being scanned. (Page 6.6)

Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.

• Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax.

(Page 6.6)

Note

If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select

2 Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.

• Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns

as in newspaper originals. (Page 6.6)

When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number

using the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on

• Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or

color. (Page 6.6)

• Back: Returns to the Basic tab.

6.2

the right side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax

numbers.

Note

Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.

(Page 6.6)

Automatic resending

When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the

machine automatically redials the number.

To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial

attempts, refer to the next following steps.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

To add a number, press Add No.

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then

enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and

send a fax to destinations.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press Redial.

Note

• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the

machine start transmission. Or press the Job Status button,

and select the job you want to delete, press Delete.

Select Redial Term and Redial Times.

• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the

message asking to place another page.

• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email

at the same time. (Page 7.4)

Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Place the originals face up into the DADF.

Press OK.

Redialing the last number

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

Place the originals face up into the DADF.

Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten

recent fax numbers.

Select a fax number in the list and press OK.

The machine automatically begins to send.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.

Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.

Delaying a fax transmission

You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not

be present.

Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.

Press Fax from the Main screen.

If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/

Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers

and select a fax number.

Place the originals face up in the DADF.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.

Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the

remote fax machine.

6.3

Press On.

Receiving a fax

Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start

This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving

methods available.

Time with left/right arrows.

Changing the receive modes

Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a

fax, the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and

automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode

to another mode, refer to next steps.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

• If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name

as 'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then

enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Note

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive

Mode.

Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You

can set Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than

the current time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the

time starting from 1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning

message will appear and the machine resets it to the current

time.

Select the option.

• Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then

Start.

• Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the

fax reception mode.

Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.

• Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine

attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,

and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If

the fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine

automatically switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.

Note

To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.

Sending a priority fax

Press OK.

This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of

reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and

immediately transmitted when the current operation is finished. In

addition, priority transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple

destinations between stations (example, when the transmission to station

A ends, before transmission to station B begins) or between redial

attempts.

Note

When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any

incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data

stored in the memory.

Receiving manually in Telephone mode

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Place the originals face up in the DADF.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.

Press On.

You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing

Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine

begins receiving a fax.

Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/

Fax mode

To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT

socket on the back of your machine. (Page 1.4)

Press OK.

If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the

message as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the

line, it automatically starts to receive the fax.

Press Start to start the urgent fax job.

6.4

Faxing (Optional)>

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.

Note

Select On.

• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering

machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected

to EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode

after a predefined number of rings.

Enter Passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on

the control panel.

• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter,

set the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.

Note

To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this

case, the received fax will be printed out.

• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is

connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering

machine, or the outgoing message from the answering

machine will interrupt your phone conversation.

Printing received faxes on both sides of the paper

• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy

job.

Set this duplex feature to save paper. When the machine prints the

received fax data, it prints them on both sides of the paper.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Receiving faxes manually using an extension

telephone

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then

enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone

connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can

receive a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension

telephone, without going to the fax machine.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Received Fax Printing >

Duplex.

Select appropriate option.

When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones,

• Off: Prints only one side of the paper.

press the keys

fax.

on the extension phone. The machine receives the

• Long Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding

will be the long edge.

Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from

the remote machine, try pressing once again.

• Short Edge: Prints both sides of the paper, however the binding

will be the short edge.

To change the to, for example, , follow the next steps.

Press OK.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Receiving faxes in memory

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then

enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while

you are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are

copying or printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory.

Then, as soon as you finish copying or printing, the machine

automatically prints the fax.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.

Select On.

Press left/right arrows to display number 3.

Adjusting the document settings

Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as

resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of

this section.

Press OK.

Receiving in secure receiving mode

Note

You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by

unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict

printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure

receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.

The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want

to change the default setting on document settings, refer to

Admin Setting > General tab > Default Settings. (Page 10.2)

Duplex

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select

whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then

enter password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.

6.5

Faxing (Optional)>

Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the

value.

You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned

colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Press On to activate

this function and press OK.

Note

• 1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.

Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to

Photo.

• 2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.

Resolution

Color Mode

Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received

document.

You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only

applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.

Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle

the values.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.

• Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.

• Color: Transmits a fax in color.

Note

Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent

manually. (Page 6.3)

• Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This

option will reduce the transmission time.

• Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small

characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix

printer.

Setting up a fax phonebook

• Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely

fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also

supports a Super Fine resolution.

Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and

transmission settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual

and Group.

Note

For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available.

The resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.

• Individual: Stores up to 200 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which

are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..

Original Type

• Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document

to several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.

Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list

on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising

of many Individual entries.

You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a

document being scanned.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate

option on the screen and press OK.

The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed Dial

No..

• Text: For originals with text or line art.

• Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.

• Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.

Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance

the darkness degree and press OK.

Erase Background

6.6

Faxing (Optional)>

Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.

Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)

Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.

• Group Dial ID: Enters the group name.

• Group Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If

you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.

Press OK.

Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this

step until you added entries you need.

•

Edit: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..

New: Creates the new Speed Dial No..

Delete: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..

• Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in

Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.

•

Detail: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is

grouped. (Page 6.7)

Apply: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number

list in the Basic tab.

Cancel: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.

Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane,

Group list.

Press New.

Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up

keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number

keypad on the control panel.

Press OK to save the numbers.

Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru Web

Service

You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer

using SyncThru Web Service.

Open the web browser in your computer.

Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru Web Service

shows.

• ID: Enters the name.

(Example. http://123.123.123.123)

• Speed Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If

you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.

Press Machine Settings > Fax Setup > Fax Phone Book.

Select Speed Dial (Individual).

• Fax No.: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area

code if necessary.

Note

Press OK.

Fax numbers are already stored in Speed Dial (Individual) can

be used when selecting.

Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)

Press Add.

Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.

Enter Index, Name and Phone Number. Index you enter here will be

the Speed Dial No. in the display screen of your machine.

Press New.

Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up,

Press Apply.

enter the name.

Note

Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.

6.7

Printing (Deleting) the polling document

Using the polling option

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).

Enter Passcode

Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a

document. This is useful when the person with the original document is

not in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the

machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the

document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has

the original.

Press OK.

Note

Polling a remote fax

To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the

polling feature.

This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote

machine.

The polling process is as follows:

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Sender stores the originals in the machine. (Page 6.8)

Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.

Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.

Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when

requested. (Page 6.8)

Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.

Storing the originals for polling

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document, face down.

Note

Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a

specific time within 24 hours.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

Enter Passcode and destination fax number using the number

keypad on the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode

from sender with the remote fax machine.

Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.

Press OK.

Polling from a remote Mailbox

This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the

Mailbox of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be

informed of Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (Page 6.9)

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode

(The four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you

do not want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you

can store, delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any

passcode.

Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.

Note

If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in

the Mailbox. (Page 6.9)

Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data

will be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If

you select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.

Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.

Give the Passcode to the receiver.

6.8

Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field

Press Edit Mailbox.

are filled with information from the sender.

Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control

panel. Up to 20 numbers you can enter.

Note

10 Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either

You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the

remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.

alphabet or number up to 20 digits.

11 Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control

Press OK.

panel.

Note

If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the

machine does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as

storing, deleting, printing, receiving.

Using Mailbox

You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the

receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to

program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the

Mailbox must be created.

12 Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax

is received into Mailbox.

13 Press OK.

Creating Mailbox

Storing originals in Mailbox

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.

Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then

enter the password and press OK.

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document faced down.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.

Press Mailbox Setup.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.

Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox

List.

Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.

6.9

Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating

Mailbox in page 6.9.

Printing a report after sending a fax

You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is

successfully completed or not.

Note

The detailed information is available in advanced setup

part. (Page 10.9)

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press OK.

Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send

Report.

Note

• Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox

Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter

Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the

confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.

Press On.

• Printing a Mailbox

Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter

Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.

Faxing to a remote Mailbox

To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you

can use the Send to Remote feature.

Press OK.

Press Fax from the Main screen.

Sending a fax in toll save time

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass with a single original document face down.

You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a

telephone fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be

stored in machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll

save time.

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.

Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field

are filled with information from the receiver.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Toll Save.

Press On.

Press OK.

Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right

arrows.

6.10

Press OK.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax

Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.

With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other

destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in

the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.

10 Press OK.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved

in memory.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive

Forward.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Send Batch.

Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the

control panel.

Press On.

• If you want to set the start time and end time, select Start Time

and End Time.

Press OK.

• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax,

set the Forward & Print.

When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in

delay fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more

documents to reserved delay fax.

Press OK.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email

Forwarding a received fax to other destination

Note

You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other

destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive

the fax, this feature may be useful.

If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.

Note

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail

server and IP address in SyncThru Web Service.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

• If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a

fax with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax

Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send

Forward.

You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other

destination by faxing.

Press On.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard

on the display.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press OK.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an

Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send

Forward.

Note

Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control

panel.

If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.

Press OK.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

6.11

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press Forward.

Press OK.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Setting up the end fax tone

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting >

Receive Forward.

The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received

can be turned on or off.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option

using the keyboard on the display.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set

the Forward & Print.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Fax Ending Sound.

Press On.

Press OK.

Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by

server

Press OK.

Note

If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.

The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior

to this option on.

Setting up receiving faxes in color

This function allows you to recieve faxes in color.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Rx Color Printing.

Press On.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send

Forward.

Press On.

Press OK.

Forwarding a received fax to other destination by

server

Note

If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.

The server setting must be done in SyncThru Web Service prior

to this option on.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Press down arrow on the right side.

Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting >

Receive Forward.

6.12

Understanding the Scan screen

7Scanning

To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the Main screen. If the

Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital

files.

screen displays an other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to

directly connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using

the network scan feature which scans and sends to a specific destination

via the network.

If you want to use the USB cable to scan originals, refer to the Scanning

part of Software section. Your machine offers the following ways to scan

an image using a local connection.

• Via one of the preset imaging applications. Scanning an image

launches the selected application, enabling you to control the

scanning process.

Note

• Via the SmarThru program supplied with your machine.

• Via the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver.

If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the

network administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru

Web Service.(Page 11.9)

If you want to use the network scan feature, press Scan on the display to

open three options of Scan to Email, NetScan and Scan to Server.

Press Scan to Email, NetScan or Scan to Server.

This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the

different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.

This chapter includes:

•

Understanding the Scan screen

User authentication for network scanning

Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)

Scanning originals and sending via NetScan

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP (Scan to Server)

Changing the scan feature settings

• Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the

destination by email. (Page 7.4)

• NetScan: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination

with the Samsung Network Scan Manager program. (Page 7.6)

• Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the

destination with SMB and FTP. (Page 7.7)

Basic tab

This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to

Server, and NetScan's basic screen.

Scan to Email

• From: Sender's email address.

• To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an

additional recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their

name be displayed.

7.1

Scanning>

• Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.

Advanced tab

• Remove All: Erases everything in the input area.

• Address: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored

addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from

your computer using the SyncThru Web Service. (Page 7.5)

• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the

paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of

paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).

• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.

• Back: Returns to the previous screen. If the network

authentication is enabled, the log off confirmation message popes

up and closes Scan to Email.

• Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 7.8)

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Image tab

NetScan

If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name

and password to enter the NetScan screen.

• Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo.

(Page 7.8)

• Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the

original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.

(Page 7.8)

• No.: Lists the number in order for application programs.

• Application: Shows the available application programs from your

computer.

• Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use

left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 7.9)

• Select: Moves to the application program you have selected.

• Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.

(Page 7.9)

Scan to Server

• Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 7.9)

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Output tab

• SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.

• FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.

• No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.

(Page 7.7)

• Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (Page 7.9)

• Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru Web Service.

(Page 7.7)

• File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 7.9)

• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the

paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of

paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).

• Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as

file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each

specific purpose. (Page 7.9)

• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

7.2

Scanning>

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 88.

User authentication for network scanning

To send an email, FTP, SMB or Network, you must register authorized

local or network users using SyncThru™ Web Service.

You can add a backup domain as a previous step.

Click Apply.

• If user authentication has been activated, only authorized local users

or on the DB server (SMB, LDAP, Kerberos) can send scanned data to

the network (email, FTP, SMB).

Network user authorized by SMB

• For network scanning using the authentication feature, you must

SyncThru™ Web Service.

Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.

Select IP Address or Host Name.

• User authentication has 3 options: none (Default), network

authentication, and local authentication.

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 139.

Registering local authorized users

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

You can add a backup domain as a previous step.

Click Apply.

Click Machine Settings.

Note

Select Local Authentication on the General Setup of the User

Authentication web page.

User can add up to 6 alternate domains.

Click Add.

Select an index number corresponding to the location for storing the

entry, from 1 to 500.

Network authorized user by LDAP

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

Enter your name, auth ID, password, e-mail address and phone

number.

Click Machine Settings and LDAP Server Setup.

Select IP Address or Host Name.

You need to enter the registered user ID and password in the

machine when you start scanning to email from the control panel.

Click Apply.

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

The default port number is 389.

Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click

Go to access the web site of your machine.

Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP

directory tree.

Click Machine Settings.

Select Authentication method. Two options for LDAP server login.

Select Network Authentication on the General Setup of User

Authentication web page.

Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID

(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).

Click Apply and OK.

Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.

Select the Authentication Type that you prefer.

Configure the values for each feature, as follows.

Click Apply.

Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN for adding Base

DN to login name.

Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute

(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).

Network user authenticated by Kerberos

10 Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search

results and search timeout.

Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.

Select IP Address or Host Name.

Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.

7.3

Scanning>

Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.

Note

LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search referral server if the

LDAP server has no data to reply to query and if the LDAP

server has a referral server.

11 Select Serach Name Order that you desire.

12 Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.

Note

• From: Sender's address. Touch From and then the keyboard pops

up on the screen. Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email

addresses. Or you can use Local and Global to enter the

addresses easily. (Page 7.5)

This option is only provided if you have selected the Network

authentication option in the user authentication setting. You

may check this option if you want to search for information in

a default email address group.

• To/Cc/Bcc: Recipient's email address manually with the pop up

keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global

addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the

LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (Page 7.5)

13 Click Apply.

• Subject: Title of email.

Scanning originals and sending through email

(Scan to Email)

• Message: Enters the text which will be as the contents of the

email. The maximum size is 1KB.

You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several

destinations from the machine by email.

Note

To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.

Sending a scanned image to several destinations

as an email attachment

Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.

• Duplex: Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side

only, or on both sides.

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner

glass for one sheet of paper.

• Resolution: Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right

arrows.

Press the Start button to scan and send the file.

Note

While the machine is sending an email, you cannot do the copy

job either sending a fax.

Setting up an e-mail account

To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up

network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.

Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup.

Press Scan from the Main screen.

Note

If the authentication message shows, enter User Name

and Password. This message shows only when the network

administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web

Service. (Page 11.9)

Select IP Address or Host Name.

Press Scan to Email.

Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs.

(Page 7.2)

7.4

The default port number is 25.

Click Add.

Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require

authentication.

Select the Group number and enter Group Name.

Select email addresses by clicking the check boxes.

Click Apply.

Enter the SMTP server login name and password.

10 Click Apply.

Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your

machine by pressing Group.

Note

If the authentication method of SMTP server is

POP3beforeSMTP, check the box next to SMTP Requires

Global

POP3 Before SMTP Authentication.

Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are

processed by the LDAP server.

a.Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host

name.

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.

b.Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port

number is 25.

Storing email addresses

Click Machine Settings > LDAP Server Setup. Then the LDAP

Server screen shows on the right side.

There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's

memory and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on

where they are stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the

machine's memory, and Global is that email addresses are stored in the

certain (LDAP) server.

Enter IP Address or Host Name or Host Name and LDAP server

and Port.

Enter optional information.

Through the SyncThru Web Service, you can easily enter and store

email addresses from your computer.

Click Apply.

Note

Individual

The LDAP server administrator must store the email address

data. The method of storing is varies depending on the server

and the operating systems.

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.

Entering email addresses by the address book

Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address

book, you can simply enter email addresses.

Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Individual Address

Book. Then the screen shows Individual Address Book on the

right side of the screen.

Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.

Click Add.

When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Index number,

enter User Name and E-mail Address.

Click Apply.

Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine

by pressing Local > the Individual tab.

Group

The search window shows.

Access to the SyncThru Web Service from your computer.

Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.

Click Machine Settings > E-mail Setup > Group Address Book.

Then the screen shows Group Address Book on the right side.

7.5

Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for. Or

press Search to specify the search criteria.

Scanning originals and sending via NetScan

You can scan an image on the machine via the Network Scan program

which is installed in your networked computer.

Preparation for network scanning

Make sure the printer software is installed on your computer using the

Printer Software CD-ROM, since the printer software and should include

the Network Scan program. See page 3.2 for detailed information on

installation steps.

When the search is completed, the screen displays the search

results.

In Windows, select Start

Utilities > Network Scan > Network Scan.

Programs > Samsung Network Printer

Press From and enter your email address and press OK.

The Samsung Network Scan Manager window opens.

Select the address you want in the right-hand pane, and the press

To, Cc or Bcc in the left-hand pane.

Click the Add Device button.

Click Next.

Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.

Select Connect to this scanner and enter the IP address of your

machine.

Press OK.

Or select Browse for a scanner. (recommended) to show a list of

scanners on your network.

Entering email addresses by the keyboard

When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or message input field,

the keyboard shows on the display screen.

Click Next.

Select your machine from the list and enter a name, user ID, and

PIN (Personal Identification Number) for the machine.

The following explanation is the example that you are entering

"[email protected]".

Note

Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.

• The model name of your machine is automatically entered as

the scanner name, but it can be changed upon your need.

• The ID can be entered up to 8 characters. The first character

must be a letter.

• The PIN must be of 4 digits.

Click Next.

Click Finish.

Your machine is added to the scanner list of the Network Scan

program and you can now scan images through the network.

Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.

Press @.

Note

You can change the scanner properties of your machine and the

scan settings from the Samsung Network Scan Manager

window. Click Properties and set the options in each tab.

Press a, b, c.

Press . and press c, o, m.

Note

Scanning and sending via NetScan

To enter contents in other fields, press

keyboard.

on the

Make sure that your machine and the computer are connected to a

network and Samsung Network Scan Manager is running on the

computer.

Press OK after finishing all the contents.

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single

original document face down on the scanner glass.

7.6

Press Scan from the Main screen.

10 Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.

Note

The default port number is 139.

If the authentication message shows, enter User Name

11 Enter the share name of the server.

and Password. This message shows only when the network

administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web

Service. (Page 11.9)

12 Put a check mark next to in Anonymous if you want to allow the

SMB server to be accessed by unauthorized persons.

Press NetScan.

By default, this is unchecked.

When the authentication message pops up, enter ID and

Password. ID and Password that are which you have entered

during the configuration of the Network Scan program. (Page 7.6)

13 Enter the login name and password.

14 Enter the domain name of the SMB server.

When login is completed, the screen shows the NetScan server

address which is the networked computer. Additionally, this shows

Application list that is configured in Samsung Network Scan

Manager.

15 Enter the location for storing the scanned image. This is the location

you entered in step 7.

16 Click Apply.

Select one from the application list and press Select.

Press Start on the control panel to start scanning.

The original will be scanned and sent to your computer.

Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server

Press Scan from the Main screen.

Note

If the authentication message shows, enter User Name

and Password. This message shows only when the network

administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru Web

Service. (Page 11.9)

Scanning originals and sending via SMB/ FTP

(Scan to Server)

Press Scan to Server.

You can scan an image and send it to a total of 5 destinations via the SMB

or FTP.

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single

original document face down on the scanner glass.

Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP

Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.

Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the

scanned file.

Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.

Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in

the SyncThru Web Service.

Note

The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru Web

Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB.

Apply the same steps for setting up the FTP server.

Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.

Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.

Click Go to access the SyncThru Web Service.

Click Machine Settings > SMB Setup > Server List. The Server

List is then displayed on the right side of the screen.

Select the destination SMB server.

Click Add.

Note

Select the index number from 1 to 20.

You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or

FTP servers.

Enter a name in Alias for the Setup for the corresponding Server

List entry. This name will be displayed on your machine.

Press Start on the control panel.

Select IP Address or Host Name.

The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to

the specified server.

Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.

7.7

Original Size

Changing the scan feature settings

You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre-

defined size, or putting in the margin value or Auto. If you set this option

to Auto, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.

This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,

such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and

more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but

after that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab

> Original Size. Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the

appropriate option and press OK.

Duplex

This feature especially applies when the original documents to be

scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only

one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >

Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.

• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.

• 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.

• 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both

sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.

Original Type

You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of

a document being scanned.

Note

To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load

the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not

detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to

1 Sided.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.

Resolution

You can adjust document resolution.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >

Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value

you select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.

• Text: For originals that have text or line art.

• Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs

together.

• Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Commonly, 100 dpi , 200 dpi and 300 dpi resolution are available only

when Color Mode is set to Color or Gray. The following table shows

detailed information feature, resolution and file format options.

Color Mode

Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.

Feature

Resolution (dpi)

File Format

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Color Mode. Select the appropriate option and press OK.

Scan to Email

100, 200, 300, 400,

600

PDF, Single-Page

TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,

JPEG

NetScan

100, 200, 300, 400,

600

PDF, TIFF, JPEG

Scan to Server

100, 200, 300, 400,

600

PDF, Single-Page

TIFF, Multi-Page TIFF,

JPEG

•

Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for

each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.

7.8

• Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per

Note

pixel.

When you set Color Mode to Gray, the Quality option is

grayed out.

Scan Preset

This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan

job.

•

Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >

Scan Preset.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your

original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the

output darker.

• Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal

quality documents.

• High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with

the largest file size.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press

OK.

• Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file

size of the output.

• OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect

the highest quality images.

• Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file

size of output is small.

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning

colored paper or newspaper originals.

• Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Erase Background. Select On and press OK.

File Format

You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.

Scan to Edge

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > File

Format.

You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the

machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin,

especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.

But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the

machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >

Scan to Edge. Select On and press OK.

• PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.

Quality

• Single-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual

TIFF file.

You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher

quality you select a larger file size you get.

Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >

Quality.

• Multi-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.

• JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.

7.9

Scanning>

8 Basic printing

This chapter explains common printing tasks.

Printing a document

Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or

Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary

depending on the application you use.

For details about printing, see Software section.

Canceling a print job

If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the

printer group in Windows, delete the job as follows:

Click the Windows Start menu.

For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.

For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

For Windows Vista, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound

> Printers.

Double-click the Samsung CLX-8380 Series PCL 6 icon. (Or

Samsung CLX-8380 Series PS)

From the Document menu, select Cancel.

Note

You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the

printer icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.

You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.

8.1

Press USB Format, USB Print or Scan to USB.

9Using USB flash memory

This chapter explains how to use an USB memory device with your

machine.

This chapter includes:

•

About USB memory

Understanding the USB screen

Plugging in an USB memory device

Scanning to an USB memory device

Scan to USB

• USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB

memory device one by one or all at once by reformatting the

device.

Changing the scan feature settings

Printing from a USB memory device

• USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory

device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files.

(Page 9.5)

• Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color

mode for each scanning to USB job. (Page 9.2)

About USB memory

USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities

to give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded

music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files

you want to store or move.

Plugging in an USB memory device

The USB memory port on the side of your machine is designed for

USB V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices.

You can do the following on your machine using an USB memory device:

• Scan documents and save them on an USB memory device.

• Print data stored on an USB memory device.

You must use an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type

connector.

• Format the USB memory device.

Use only a metal/shielded

USB memory device.

Understanding the USB screen

To use the USB memory device, press USB on the Main screen. If the

Note

screen displays an other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

There are two USB plug types.

Note

When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on

your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.

9.1

Using USB flash memory>

Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the side of

your machine.

Scan to USB

Basic tab

• Name: The folder names on the USB memory device.

• Date: Tha date which folders are made.

• Select: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.

• New Folder: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.

• Detail: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.

• Rename: Renames the folder or file name.

Cautions

• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in

operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. This may

damage your machine.

• If your USB memory device has certain features, such as

security settings and password settings, your machine may not

automatically detect it. For details about these features, see

the device’s User’s Guide.

• Delete: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.

• Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the

paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of

paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).

• Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.

Scanning to an USB memory device

• File Name: Names a file before you scan a document by just

clicking this field.

You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB

memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the

default settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own

scan setting. (Page 9.3)

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Advanced tab

Scanning

Insert an USB memory device into the USB memory port on the rear

side of your machine.

Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original

face down on the scanner glass. (Page 4.1)

Press USB from the Main screen.

Press the Scan to USB.

• Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (Page 9.3)

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Select the appropriate option. (Page 9.3)

Press OK.

Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.

After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory

device from the machine.

9.2

Using USB flash memory>

Image tab

Changing the scan feature settings

This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,

such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and

more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but

after that period, the options will be reset to default values.

Duplex

This feature especially applies when the original documents to be

scanned are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only

one side of the paper or both sides of the paper.

• Original Type: Selects whether the original is text, text/photo or

photo. (Page 9.4)

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right

arrows to toggle the values.

• Color Mode: Selects the color options of the scan output. If the

original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.

(Page 9.4)

• Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use

left/right arrow to adjust the values. (Page 9.4)

• 1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.

• Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns.

(Page 9.4)

• 2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.

• 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both

sides. But the back is rotated 180 degrees.

• Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (Page 9.4)

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Note

Output tab

To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load

the originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not

detect the original on DADF, automatically changes the option to

1 Sided.

Resolution

You can adjust document resolution.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right

arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result

you get. But the scanning time may take longer.

• Quality: Adjusts the scan quality of the scan output. (Page 9.4)

• Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as

file format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each

specific purpose. (Page 9.4)

• File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (Page 9.5)

Original Size

• File Policy: You can choose the policy for generating file name

The machine senses and determines the size of the original.

before you proceed with the scan job through USB. (Page 9.5)

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Use up/

down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and

press OK.

9.3

Using USB flash memory>

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness. Press right

arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.

Original Type

You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of

a document being scanned.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the

appropriate option and press OK.

Erase Background

You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning

colored paper or newspaper originals.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select

On and press OK.

Scan to Edge

• Text: For originals that have text or line art.

You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the

machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin,

especially when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray.

But if you scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the

machine does not need to exclude the edges from the originals.

• Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs

together.

• Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.

Color Mode

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select On

and press OK.

Use this option to scan the original in Mono, Gray or Color mode.

Quality

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select the

appropriate option and press OK.

You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher

quality you select a larger file size you get.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.

•

Color: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for

each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.

• Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per

pixel.

Scan Preset

This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.

•

Mono: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.

• Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal

quality documents.

• High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with

the largest file size.

Darkness

You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your

original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the

output darker.

• Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file

size of the output.

9.4

Using USB flash memory>

• OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect

the highest quality images.

Printing from a USB memory device

• Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file

size of output is small.

You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print

TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF and PRN files.

• Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.

Direct Print option supported file types:

• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are

compatible.

File Format

You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.

• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when

you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file,

rather than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion

can be printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to

learn how to create a PRN file.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.

• BMP: BMP Uncompressed

• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline

• JPEG: JPEG Baseline

• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below

• PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.

To print a document from a USB memory device:

• Single-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Format), and several originals are scanned as an each individual

TIFF file.

Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory porton the rear

side of your machine.

• Multi-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File

Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data

stored on it.

Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.

• JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.

Press USB from the Main screen.

• BMP: Scans original in BMP format.

Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file

name.

Note

The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been

If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.

Press USB Print.

selected for Color Mode.

File Policy

Press Start on the control panel to begin printing

You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed

with the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same

name when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.

Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.

• Rename: If the USB memory already has the same name when

you entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different

name that is automatically programmed.

• Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete previous job

information on USB as you store new job information.

9.5

Machine Status screen

10Machine status and

advanced setup

Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.

This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine,

and the method of setting for the advanced machine setup. Please read

this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.

This chapter includes:

•

Machine Setup

Browsing the machine’s status

General settings

Copy Setup

• Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of

the machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.

• Machine Info. tab: Displays the detailed information about the

machine, and some options allows for validating your machine.

(Page 10.2)

Fax Setup

Network Setup

Authentication

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

Optional Service

Adjusting the color contrast

Printing a report

Admin Setting screen

Gives you access to detailed machine settings.

Note

When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If

the administrator set the password, you have to enter the

password every time you want to use Admin Setting.

(Page 3.5)

Machine Setup

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Select the appropriate item for your occasion.

• General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as

location, date, time, and more. (Page 10.2)

• Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.

• Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network, login, and an option to

service for enabling the feature listed on the screen.

• Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine. When

you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter

password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)

• Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a

report of machine features. (Page 10.9)

• Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their

status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.

• Back: Returns to the previous screen.

• Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of

printouts depending on the paper size and type.

10.1

Press the General tab.

Browsing the machine’s status

You can browse the machine information and validate some features of

the machine.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Machine Status > the Machine Info. tab.

Option

Description

Device Info

The sub-options available are Service Center

Registration and Contact Info. You may enter

information on service center and purchasing

point.

Date & Time

You can set the date and time. (Page 3.5)

Option

Description

Default Settings

• Default Window: Set the first window that

will appear on the display screen after turning

on the machine or waking up from the Power

Save. For example, if you select Fax as a

default window, the first window will be the

Basic tab of the Fax feature. In case you

want to show ID Copy as a default window,

you need to enable this feature in Default

Option previously.

• Default Option: Changes all the default

values for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning

and paper at once. (Page page 3.6)

• Home: Allows user to arrange each function

in the display screen.

Machine Details

This option shows the customer support

information on the email address and the

phone number you stored from Admin

Setting. Also, you can check the machine's

serial number, or the hardware and software

information specification.

Print/Report

Tray Status

You can print various helpful and informative

reports such as System Report, Fax Report

and Scan Report. (Page 11.1)

The screen shows the trays installed on

your machine, and their current

configurations. Select the tray and Edit to

change the settings for paper type and size.

Note: Depending on the optional kit you

installed or the category you selected, the

selectable options on the display screen may

differ.

Usage Counters

You can view the amount of each category

that your machine has printed so far. To

print this report, see page 10.9.

Measurements

Timers

This option lets you change the measurement

unit to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric

separation (comma or period).

General settings

The machine cancels a printing job if data does

not be received in specific time.

Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up

the machine parameters.

• System Timeout: The machine returns to the

default value after certain time the machine

waits. You can set a time for maximum 10

minutes.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)

• Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job

for a specific time period. You can set a time

period for at least an hour.

Language

It allows you to change the language that

appears on the touch screen.

10.2

Option

Description

Option

Sound

Description

Power Saver

You can reduce energy consumption by setting

these features. Power Saver has two options,

first Low Power Save turns off the scanner

lamp under the glass. Power Save turns off the

fans within the machine except a core fan for

the fuser unit. (Page 3.6)

You can adjust the loudness of the machine

sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's

error sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the

wrong option. Press Selection to sound

whenever you press the selection from your

touch screen.

Tray

Management

This feature allows you to select the tray and

paper you use for a printing job. Paper size,

paper type, and paper color options are

adjusted here. Tray Confirmation Message is

to activate the window asking whether you set

the paper size and type for the just opened tray.

Supplies

Management

The machine gives you the notification of the

drum and toner to reorder, and resets the used

fuser counter, bias transfer roller, feed roller and

document feeder friction pad counter.

Machine Test

The machine prints the test image patterns

using Image Quality Test Patterns.

• Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled

with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty

and this option is On, then the machine

continues printing with paper in tray2.

• Auto Continue: When the paper is

mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with

the letter size paper, but the printing job

needs A4 size paper, the machine will wait for

30 seconds to paper in tray1 with proper

sized paper. After 30 seconds, the machine

automatically starts printing with Letter sized

paper.

On Demand

Overwrite

You can set the machine to delete previous job

information on HDD as you store new job

information. To activate this feature, go to

Admin Setting > the Setup tab > Optional

Service and set the On Demand Image

Overwrite option to Enable. After activating

this feature you can overwrite a HDD by

pressing Start in the display.

HDD Spoolling

To spool documents in HDD for the network

printing, select On.

• Paper Substitution: When the paper is

mismatched, this option sets the machine

print A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or

vice versa.

• Wide A4: It is useful when printing in DOS

mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a

line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is

usual in DOS mode.

Stored Job File

Policy

You can choose the file policy for generating file

name before you proceed with the job through

HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same

name when you entered a new file name, you

can rename or overwrite it.

• Rename: If you HDD memory already has

the same name when you enter a new file

name, the file will be saved as a different

name that is automatically programmed.

• Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete

previous job information on HDD as you store

new job information

Altitude

Adjustment

Print quality is affected by atmospheric

pressure, which atmospheric pressure is

determined by the height of the machine above

sea level. This feature lets you adjust the

altitude in a height district. Higher altitude

location need to set this feature to High 3,

which affects print quality.

Country

You can change the country, then some the

values for fax and paper size will be changed

automatically for your country. After installing

the fax kit, you must change the country.

Output Options

Output Options is for, when the staples run

out, you to let the machine stop processing and

wait to refill the staples or continue the job. If

you set Within Job Offsetting to On, the

output paper is placed and sorted by job unit.

Contention

Management

This feature lets you to select the priority

between copy jobs and print jobs.

• Priority: Set the priority by numbering the

job. The machine starts from the least to the

highest number in order.

• First In, First Out: The machine does an

asked job in order.

10.3

Copy Setup

Fax Setup

For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.

This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax

system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and

needs.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

password and press OK.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup.

password and press OK.

Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.

Option

Description

Note

Page Number

Time & Date

ID Stamp

If you select this option On, each copy will include

the page number on the bottom of each page.

The fax options are different from country to country

depending on the international communication regulatory. If

the display screen does not show or gray out some of the

fax options explained herein, it means that the grayed out

function does not supported in your communication

environment.

Set this option On in order to print the date and

time on each copy, set from the General tab.

This option is used to set words or a message

to print on your copies. Set this option On and

an input screen will be displayed, write your

message using the pop up keyboard.

Option

Description

Machine ID &

Fax No

Enter the machine ID name and fax number

which will be printed at the top of each page.

Manual ID Copy

Setup

This option sets the ID copy settings such as

the number of images or copying positions

manually. (Page 5.5)

Receive Start

Code

This feature works best when you are using an

extension telephone connected to the EXT

socket on the back of your machine. You can

receive a fax from someone you are talking to

on the extension telephone, without going to the

fax machine. (Page 6.5)

Error Correction

Mode

It helps with poor line quality and makes sure

any faxes you send are properly transmitted to

any other ECM-equipped fax machines.

Sending a fax using ECM may take more time.

Fax Initial Setup

You can set Receive Mode for Telephone, Fax

or Answering Machine/Fax, and Dial Mode at

either Tone or Pulse.

When you select Answering Machine/Fax,

you can receive a fax while the line is being

used by the answering machine. (Page 6.4)

Contact your local telephone company for Dial

Mode setting information.

10.4

Option

Description

Option

Description

Ring to Answer

You can specify the number of times the

machine rings before answering an incoming

call.

Junk Fax Setup

The machine does not accept faxes sent from

remote stations if their numbers are stored in

the memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter

a maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press

Junk Fax Setup and Edit, then, enter the fax

numer. If you have set Caller ID enabled, you

can browse the last received fax numbers and

select a fax number from the list.

Receive Header

Secure Receive

Use this option to automatically print the page

number, date and time of fax reception at the

bottom of each page.

You may need to prevent your received faxes

from being accessed by unauthorized people.

This feature restricts printing of received faxes

when the machine is unattended. If you select

this option to On, all incoming faxes go into

memory.

Ring Volume

This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you

select Off, the machine does not ring.

Dial Tone

Volume

When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax,

you can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone

volume, you can use this feature.

A four-digit Passcode is used when you want

to print out received faxes in memory.

(Page 6.5)

Mailbox Setup

• Document Policy: You can set the document

stored in Mailbox to delete or retain

documents after. Select On of each option to

delete, Off to remain the data.

• Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or

delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox

Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing

options. (Page 6.9)

• When receiving a fax containing pages longer

than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine

can reduce the size of the original to fit the size

of the paper loaded in the machine. If this

feature is set to Off, the machine cannot

reduce the original to fit onto one page. The

original will be divided and printed in actual

size on two or more pages. If you set this

option to On and set the discard size to 10 mm

and the received data is longer then the

currently set paper in the tray, the machine

minuses the specified segment set as the

discard size.

Received Fax

Printing

Note: If you set the Notification option to On,

you are notified when a fax is received in

Mailbox. (Page 6.9)

Output Tray

Toll Save

This feature lets you select the paper tray to

use for receiving a fax.

Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save

time for saving. (Page 6.10)

• You can set the machine to print out the fax on

both sides of the paper, or stapled. (Page 6.5)

Send Batch

The machine asks you whether you want to add

the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the

fax number you have dialed is same as the

delay fax number. (Page 6.11)

Redial

The machine can automatically redial a remote

fax machine, if it was busy. You can set the

number of redial attempts and an interval

between attempts. Selecting 0 for Redial

Times means that the machine will not use this

feature.

Fax Forward

Settings

You can forward a sent or received fax to other

destination by a fax or an email. (Page 6.11)

Speaker Volume

This controls the sound when a fax actually

starts to transfer data. If this option is On, the

machine sounds from a fax starts until a fax

finishes. With Comm. the machine sounds only

until the communication is succeeded. No

sound with Off option.

Fax Ending

Sound

This setting selects whether the end fax tone is

on or off. (Page 6.12)

Rx Color

Printing

This function allows you to recieve faxes in

color. (Page 6.12)

Caller ID

If you have set this option, the machine

remembers the last twenty fax numbers.

Prefix Dial

This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to

five digits. This number will be dialed before any

automatic number is dialed. User may set this

to access a PABX(example 9) or area code

number (example 02).

10.5

Network Setup

Authentication

You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before

doing that, you must have the information concerning the type of network

protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting

to use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine

network.

This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the

password.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press the Setup tab > Authentication.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter

password and press OK.

Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.

Option

Description

TCP/IP Protocol

Select appropriate protocol and configure

parameters to use the network environment.

Note: There are lots of parameters to be set,

therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is, or

consult the network administrator.

Ethernet Speed

Clear Setting

You can select the communication speed for

Ethernet connections.

Reverts the network settings to the default

values.

10.6

Option

Description

Option

Description

Change Admin. Password

You can change the password

for the Admin Setting

authentication.

Authentication Network

It enables the authentication

mode which is set from the Job

Account menu in the

Mode

Accounting

SyncThru™ Web Admin

Service.

Optional Service

Foreign Device When you install the optional

When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to

install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate

those features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.

Interface

FDI kit, select On to activate it.

• Job Timer: If there is not

enough credit, you can set the

machine to cancel a job right

away or wait a designated

amount of time for a deposit.

• Print Job Control: When it is

enabled, the both computer

printing and copying are

possible since the credit

remains. With Disable, copy

printing needs the credit.

However, when printing a

report or a fax, the credit is not

needed.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.

• Inhibit Services: When no

credit is left, the machine

disables the copy job only with

Copy Only. With All Service,

scanning service and copy job

are disabled.

Option

Copy

Description

Enables or disables the Copy menu from the

• Internal Credits: It is used

when you cancel the job or

when the job is cancelled by

the device due to insufficient

credits (coin) or is canceled by

user’s request. If you select

Enable, the machine deposits

a credit equal to the number

of sheets that did not print out

correctly, then it prints next job

for free (for the amount

deposited). With Disable,

even if you cancel the printing

job, the machine includes

jammed paper in the count

and the cost of printing shall

be recovered for the pages

already billed.

main screen.

Analog Fax

Scan to Email

NetScan

After installing the fax kit, select this option

Enable to use this machine as a fax machine.

Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu

from the scan screen.

Set Enable to activate the scanning and

sending it via network.

Scan to SMB

Scan to FTP

On Demand

Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option

from the scan screen.

Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option

from the scan screen.

You can set the machine to delete previous job

Image Overwrite information on HDD as you store new job

information. Set this option to Enable, go to the

General tab > On Demand Overwrite, press

• Image Counter: Depends on

whether the machine counts

blank white pages.

Start in the display to start the overwriting job.

ImmediateImage If you select Enable, the machine renews the

Authentication No

It disables Authentication

Overwrite

HDD memory when you save new job on it.

Mode

Authentication Mode.

Mode

(Continue)

10.7

Option

Description

Adjusting the color contrast

Auto Color

Registration

The machine virtually prints certain patterned image

to calibrate the color printing position. This feature

enhances the colored image sharper and clearer,

which means the machine prints the colored image

on the paper more like the one in the monitor. Select

On to activate this feature. You can set the

This menu allows you to adjust the color setting.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

frequency of performing the function by pages,

temperature of a machine or LSU.

Press the Setup tab > Color.

• Page Condition: The machine performs this

feature after certain number of page has been

printed out.

• Inner Temperature Condition: The machine

performs this feature if the machine temperature is

different from the last this feature done. If you set

this option to 3, the machine detects the inner

temperature, and when the temperature difference

is over or below three degree, the machine will

perform this feature. You can set the temperature

difference by clicking arrows.

Option

Description

Custom Color This item allows you to adjust contrast, color by

• LSU Temperature Condition: The machine

performs this feature if the temperature of

LSU(Laser Scanning Unit) is different from the last

this feature done. If you set this option to 3, the

machine detects the temperature of LSU, and

when the temperature difference is over or below

three degree, the machine will perform this

feature. You can set the temperature difference by

clicking arrows.

color.

CMYK: Allows you to adjust the contrast of the toner

in each toner cartridge.

• Default: Optimizes colors automatically.

• Manual Adjust: Allows you to manually

adjust the color contrast for each cartridge.

Note: You should use the Default setting for best

color quality.

Execute Now: The printer executes the auto color

registration now.

10.8

Option

Description

Printing a report

Report

Configuration You can print a report on the

You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etcetera.

Report

machine's overall configuration.

Fax Report

You can set to print the information of

a fax reports.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK.

• Multi Send Report: When you fax

to several destination, set this

option to print a transmission report.

On is to print every time you send a

fax, the machine prints a

Press the Print/Report tab.

confirmation report. With On-Error,

only when the transmission error

occurred, the report will be printed

out.

• Fax Send Report Appearance:

You can select whether the image

on the confirmation report shows or

not.

Option

Description

• Fax Sent/Received Report: The

machine stores the logs on each

transmission and prints out every

50 logs with this option On. It you

select Off, the machine stores the

logs but does not print.

• Fax Send Report: The machine

prints the confirmation report after

each fax job, only when you send a

fax to one destination.

You can print Network

Configuration, PS3 Font List, PCL

Font List and Schedule Jobs

Report. Schedule Jobs Report

shows the job list in pending, in

waiting, in delayed faxing or the

Mailbox list as well.

Accounting Supplies

Reports Information

You can print the amount of each

category that your machine has

printed so far.

Report

E-mail

The report shows the job of scanning

Confirmation and sending it via Scan to Email.

(Continue)

Network Auth. It displays user login IDs and emails.

Log Report

Report

• On: The report is printed whether a

job successfully completed or

failed.

• Off: No report is printed after

completing a job.

• On-Error: Only in case of error

occurrence, the machine prints the

report.

Usage Page

Report

You can print the report on the

amount of printouts depending on the

paper size and type.

Accounting

Reports

Prints the report of printing out count

for each login user. This is used only

when network authentication in

enabled with SyncThru Web

Service. (Page 11.9)

Scan to Server The report shows the job of scanning

Confirmation and sending it via SMB and FTP.

• On: The report is printed whether a

job successfully completed or

failed.

• Off: No report is printed after

completing a job.

• On-Error: Only in case of error

occurrence, the machine prints the

report.

Note

You can also print machine's status information and browse

status with SyncThru Web Service. Open the web browser on

your networked computer and type the IP address of your

machine. When SyncThru Web Service opens, click

Information > Print information.

10.9

Press Print.

Note

11 Maintenance

• If you want to print the machine's network information or font

list, press Machine Setup > Admin Setting > the Print/Report

tab. In case you select the Configuration Report, just press

Print Now to print the report. The Fax Report, E-mail

Confirmation Report, and Scan to Server Confirmation

options do not provide the print, these are only for report setup.

• You can use SyncThru Web Service to print the machine's

configuration or browse the status. Open the web browser in

the networked computer, and type the machine's IP address.

When SyncThru Web Service is opened, click Information >

Print information.

This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine.

This chapter includes:

•

Printing a machine report

Monitoring the supplies life

Finding the serial number

Sending the imaging unit reorder notification

Sending the toner reorder notification

Checking Stored Documents

Cleaning your machine

Monitoring the supplies life

Maintaining the toner cartridge

Redistributing toner

If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.

Replacing the toner cartridge

Replacing the imaging unit

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Machine Status

Replacing the waste toner container

Maintenance Parts

Scroll down to browse the entire supplies with list view the

percentage remaining.

Managing your machine from the website

Finding the serial number

Printing a machine report

If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next

steps.

You can print the machine's information and job report.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

PressMachine Setup on the control panel.

Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Print/Report

Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Machine Details

Select the report type, then the right side of the screen shows the

list to print.

Sending the imaging unit reorder notification

Select the list to print.

You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is

almost over and needs to be reordered.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK

Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit

Reorder Notification.

Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not, and press

Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.

Press OK

11.1

Sending the toner reorder notification

Cleaning your machine

You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs

to be reordered.

To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below

each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality

problems occur.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Caution

• Cleaning the machine cabinet with cleaning materials that

contain large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong

substances can discolor or damage the cabinet.

Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter

password and press OK

Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge

Reorder Notification.

• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner,

we recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with

water to clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in

the air and might be harmful to you.

Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not, and press Toner

Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.

Cleaning the outside

Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the

cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into

the machine.

Press OK

Checking Stored Documents

Cleaning the inside

Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.

The machine shows the document list of the print or fax job.

Press Stored Documents on the Main screen. If the screen displays an

other menu, press (

) to go to the Main screen.

Cleaning the scan unit

Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We

suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during

the day, as needed.

Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.

Open the scanner lid.

Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is

clean and dry.

•

Public tab: Shows the job list of delay print and store print job.

• Secured tab: Shows the job list of secure print, secure receive,

and secure store print job.

•

User Name: Shows the user name who registered the job.

File Name: Shows the job name which is registered as the job

information. For the computer printing, the file name shows.

• Date: Shows the date of the job registered.

Scanner lid

Scanner glass

White sheet

DADF glass

•

Page: Shows the total page number of the job.

Detail: Pops the separate message showing the basic job

information with the file size, the paper size and the paper type, as

well.

•

Edit: Lets you to modify the file name.

Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is

clean and dry.

Delete: Deletes the selected list.

Close the scanner lid.

• Delete All: Deletes the selected all list.

•

Print: Prints the selected list. Select the number of printout in the

popup window.

11.2

Open the front cover.

Maintaining the toner cartridge

Toner cartridge storage

To get the most from the toner cartridge, keep the following guidelines in

mind:

• Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until ready for use.

• Do not refill the toner cartridge. The machine warranty does not cover

damage caused by using a refilled cartridge.

• Store toner cartridges in the same environment as your machine.

• To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light for

more than a few minutes.

Expected cartridge life

The toner cartridge yield depends on the amount of toner that print jobs

require. The actual number may also be different depending on the print

density of the pages you print on, and the number of pages may be

affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and

media size. If you print a lot of graphics, you may need to change the

cartridge more often.

Note

Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it

does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service

representative when print quality problems occur.

Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.

Redistributing toner

When the toner cartridge is near the end of its life.

• White streaks or light printing occurs.

• The toner-related message saying that the toner is low may appear on

the display.

If this happens, you can temporarily reestablish print quality by

redistributing the remaining toner in the cartridge. In some cases, white

streaks or light printing will still occur even after you have redistributed the

toner.

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to

cool.

Thoroughly roll the toner cartridge five or six times to distribute the

toner evenly inside the cartridge.

Open the side cover.

Note

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and

wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

11.3

Hold the toner cartridge and align it with the corresponding slot

inside the machine. Insert it back into its slot until it locks in place.

Open the side cover.

Note

Toner particles can be released inside the machine but it

Close the front cover, then the side cover.

does not mean the machine is damaged. Contact a service

representative when print quality problems occur.

Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the

machine on.

Open the front cover.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

Replacing the toner cartridge

The machine uses four colors and has a different toner cartridge for each

one: yellow (Y), magenta (M), cyan (C), and black (K).

When the toner cartridge is totally empty.

• The status LED and the toner-related message on the display

indicates which each individual toner cartridge should be replaced.

• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.

At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced. Check the type of

the toner cartridge for your machine. (Page 13.1)

Pull the corresponding toner cartridge out from the machine.

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to

cool.

11.4

Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.

Replacing the imaging unit

Thoroughly roll the new cartridge five or six times to distribute the

toner evenly inside the cartridge.

Expected cartridge life

The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 30,000 pages. The

screen displays Replace [xxx] Imaging Unit when the imaging unit is

near the end of life. Otherwise your printer stops printing.

Imaging unit yield may be affected by the operating environment,

optional, printing interval, media type and media size.

For ordering information for imaging unit. (Page 13.1)

Note

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to

cool.

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and

wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

Open the side cover.

Hold the new toner cartridge by the handle and slide the new toner

cartridge in until it locks in place.

Open the front cover.

Close the front cover, then the side cover.

Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the

machine on.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

11.5

Pull the waste toner container out of the machine using its handle.

Caution

Don’t use sharp objects, such as a knife or scissors, to

open the imaging unit package. You could damage the

surface of the imaging unit.

Remove the paper protecting the surface of the imaging unit.

Remove the cap, and carefully pull the seal tapes out of the imaging

unit.

Turn the imaging unit locking levers outwards to release and open

the inner cover.

10 Thoroughly shake the new imaging unit side to side five or six times.

Note

If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and

wash clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.

Caution

• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the imaging unit.

• To prevent damage, do not expose the imaging unit to

light for more than a few minutes. Cover it with a piece of

paper to protect it if necessary.

Pull the used imaging unit out of the machine using the handle on its

bottom.

Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.

11.6

11 Labels inside the machine identify each imaging unit’s position.

Holding the handles on the new imaging unit, push the imaging unit

until it locks in place.

Replacing the waste toner container

The life of the waste toner container unit is approximately 48,000 images

printing. When the life span of the waste toner container has expired,

Waste tank is full. Replace it appears on the screen display of the

control panel, indicating the waste toner container needs to be replaced.

Otherwise your printer stops printing.

To replace the waste toner container:

Turn the machine off, then wait a few minutes for the machine to

cool.

Open the side cover.

12 Turn the imaging unit locking levers inwards until it locks in place

and close the inner cover.

Open the front cover.

13 Insert the waste toner container into position and then push it to

make sure that it is firmly seated in place.

14 Close the front cover, then the side cover.

15 Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the

machine on.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

11.7

Push the lock lever up and pull the waste toner container out.

Maintenance Parts

To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts

and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items

will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the

life span of each item has expired.

Items

Part Name

Yield (Average)

Approx.

100,000 images

Transfer belt unit

Cartridge-transfer

Transfer roller

(T2)

MEA unit-TR(2)

ELA unit fuser

Approx. 100,000

pages

Fuser unit

Approx. 100,000

pages

Note

DADF rubber pad RMO-ADF rubber

Approx. 50,000

pages

When you pull out the waste toner container out of the

machine, move the container carefully not to drop it from

your hands.

DADF feed roller

MEA-ADF roller

Approx. 200,000

pages

Make sure that you lay the waste toner container on a flat

surface so that the toner does not spill.

Multi-purposetray MEA unit-holder pad

rubber pad

Approx. 50,000

pages

Remove the container’s cap from the container as shown below,

and use it to close the waste toner container openings.

Guide exit duplex MEA unit_exit duplex

Approx. 100,000

pages

Paper feed roller

Pickup roller

MEA unit-roller PU

Approx. 100,000

pages

ELA HOU-MP pickup

Approx. 100,000

pages

We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an

authorized service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the

machine. The warranty does not cover the replacement of the

maintenance parts after their lifespan.

Caution

Do not tilt or turn over the container.

Take a new waste toner container out of its package.

Insert the new container into position and then push it to make sure

that it is firmly seated in place.

Close the front cover, then the side cover.

Make sure that the cover is securely latched and then turn the

machine on.

Caution

If the cover is not completely closed, the machine will not

operate.

11.8

Managing your machine from the website

If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP

network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via

Samsung’s SyncThru Web Service, an embedded web server. Use

SyncThru Web Service to:

• View the device information and check its current status.

• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.

• Change the printer properties.

• Set the machine to send email notifications and update you on the

machine’s status.

• Get support for using the machine.

To access SyncThru Web Service:

Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.

Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address

field and press the Enter key or click Go

Your machine’s embedded website opens.

11.9

Clearing document jams

12Troubleshooting

When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming

message appears on the display screen.

This chapter gives helpful information on what to do if you encounter a

problem.

Caution

This chapter includes:

To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document

gently and slowly.

•

Tips for avoiding paper jams

Clearing document jams

Clearing paper jams

Note

To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin,

or mixed paper-type originals.

Understanding display messages

Solving other problems

Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.

Open the DADF cover.

Tips for avoiding paper jams

By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.

When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 12.3.

• Follow the procedure on page 4.7. Ensure that the adjustable guides

are positioned correctly.

• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the

paper capacity mark on the inside of the tray.

• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.

• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.

• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.

• Do not mix paper types in a tray.

• Use only recommended print media. (Page 4.9

)

• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing up in

the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.

Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.

• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:

Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the

tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)

is not supported.

Note

If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed.

(Page 12.2)

Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any,

in the DADF.

12.1

Misfeed of exiting paper

Roller misfeed

Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.

Open the DADF cover.

Open the scanner lid.

Grasp the misfed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area

by carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.

Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document

gently out of the DADF.

scanner lid

if you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.

Open the white document background.

Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the

documents back in the DADF.

12.2

Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.

Clearing paper jams

When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display

screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.

Message

Location of jam

Go to

Paper Jam in tray 1

Paper Jam in tray2

In the paper feed area Page 12.3

(tray 1, optional tray,

or multi-purpose tray)

Page 12.6

Page 12.5

Paper Jam in tray 2(HCF)

Paper Jam in tray3

Page 12.7

Paper Jam in MP tray

Paper Jam in exit area

In the fuser area

Page 12.9

Paper Jam inside of machine In the paper inside the Page 12.8

machine

Paper Jam at the bottom of In the duplex unit

Page 12.9

duplex path

Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then

load the removed pages back into the DADF.

Paper Jam at the top of

duplex path

Paper Jam inside of duplex

path

Paper jam in front of finisher Paper jammed in the Page 12.10

stacker.

Paper jam inside finisher

Paper jam inside finisher’s

duplex

Paper jammed in the Page 12.10

stacker.

Paper jam at exit of finisher

Paper jammed in the Page 12.11

stacker exit part.

Caution

To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently

and slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to

clear the jam.

In the tray 1

Open the side cover.

12.3

Open the guide in the direction shown.

Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.

Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and

then close it to clear the error message on the display.

Carefully remove the misfed paper in the direction shown.

Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of

the Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the

machine, then insert it completely.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any

paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.

Lift the front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the

machine.

12.4

Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the

machine.

In the optional tray

Note

This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in

the optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other

optional trays, since the method is same as the tray 2

Open the outer cover in tray 2.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the

paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.

Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the

paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

Open the inner cover of tray 2.

Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing

the paper, pull it out gently and slowly.

Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any

paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.

12.5

Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.

In the optional high capacity feeder

Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the

machine.

Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.

Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.

Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and

slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.

Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and

slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.

If the jammed paper is not visible, or if the paper is stuck, stop

pulling and continue on to step 5.

If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see any

paper in this area, stop and go to step 4.

12.6

Insert the paper tray and close the two covers.

In the multi-purpose tray

If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the

machine.

Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

12.7

Open the guide in the direction shown and pull the jammed paper

gently out of the machine.

In the paper inside the machine

Note

The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the

machine.

Open the side cover.

Open and close the front cover to resume printing.

Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.

If you do not see any paper in this area, go to step 3.

12.8

In the fuser area

In the duplex unit area

If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make

sure that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.

Open the side cover.

Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.

Open the side cover.

Remove the jammed paper.

Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

Close the side cover.

12.9

Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s duplex

In the stacker (finisher)

Open the stacker front cover.

Paper jam in front of finisher

Open the stacker front cover.

Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever

1b down as well.

Press right of 1c lever and then push stacker to left.

Remove the jammed paper.

Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.

Close the stacker front cover.

12.10

Troubleshooting>

Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.

Understanding display messages

Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control

panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables

below to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if

necessary. Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical

order.

Note

• If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try

the printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.

•When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the

service representative with the contents of display message.

• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on

options or models.

• [xxx] indicates the part of the each toner cartridge or each

imaging unit.

• [yyy] indicates the part of the machine.

• [zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service

center, this error code help to handle the problem.

Paper jam at exit of finisher

Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.

• You may see an exclamation mark ( ) or a cross mark (

)

on the upper left of the display, in that case, press the question

mark to browse detailed information on the supplies.

Message

Meaning

Suggested solutions

[yyy] is worn.

Replace with new

one

The life of the part

expires totally.

Replace the part with

a new one. Call for

service.

[xxx] imaging unit The toner in the

Replace the imaging

is empty. Replace

imaging unit has run unit with a Samsung-

out.

genuine toner

cartridge.

[xxx] imaging unit

is not compatible.

Check userís

guide

The imaging unit you Install a Samsung-

have installed is not

for your machine.

genuine imaging unit,

designed for your

machine.

Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.

[xxx] imaging unit

is not installed.

Install it

The imaging unit is

not installed, or the

CRUM (Consumer

Replaceable Unit

Monitor) in the

Install the imaging

unit. If it is already

installed, try to

reinstall the imaging

unit.

cartridge is not

connected.

If the problem

persists, please call

for service.

[xxx] imaging unit

is worn. Replace

with new one

The imaging unit is

at the end of its life.

When the imaging

unit replacement

message appears

on the screen and if

you select

Replace a imaging

unit with a Samsung-

genuine imaging unit.

(Page 11.5)

Continue, this

message displays.

12.11

Message

[xxx] toner

cartridge is not

compatible. Check not for your

Meaning

Suggested solutions

Message

Meaning

Suggested solutions

Did not supply

enough [xxx]

toner. Remove

seal tape &

The toner cartridge

you have installed is genuine toner

Install a Samsung-

Not supplied toner to • Remove the

the imaging unit.

sealing tape from

the imaging unit.

• Thoroughly roll the

toner cartridge five

or six times, and

reinstall it.

• Turn the machine

off and turn it on

again.

cartridge, designed

for your machine.

userís guide

machine.

reinstall

[xxx] toner

cartridge is not

installed. Install it

The toner cartridge

is not installed or the toner cartridge.

CRUM (Consumer

Replaceable Unit

Monitor) in the

Try to reinstall the

cartridge is not

properly connected.

Did not supply

enough [xxx]

toner. Please

open/close door

The machine

Open side door and

close it. If the

problem still persists,

please call for

service.

received several

papers with many

images, and it

cannot supply the

toner properly.

[xxx] toner

The color toner

You can select the

cartridge is worn.

Replace with new

one

cartridge has run out. option among Stop,

The machine stops

printing.

Continue or Mono

Only .

If you select Stop, the

Note

machine stops

If the black

toner

printing. If you select

Continue, the

Fax memory is

almost full. Print

or remove

There is no more

available fax

memory. No more

fax data can be

received.

Delete the received

fax data in the

memory. Call for

service to delete fax

memory.

cartridge is

empty,

machine keeps

printing, but the

received fax Job

Mono Only

message

does not

appear.

quality cannot be

guaranteed.

If you select Mono

Only, the machine

prints the data in

black. In this case, the

mono printing feature

is preset in the printer

properties.

Fax memory is full.

Print or remove

received fax Job

Available fax

memory is now

1MB.

Delete the received

fax data in the

memory to secure

memory. Call for

service.

When you copy, the

Start button will be

activated only with

this condition.

If you do not select

any, the machine will

work as Stop is

selected.

Finisher door is

open. Close it

The finisher cover is Close the finisher

not securely latched. until it locks into

place.

Finisher error:

[zzz]. Please turn

off then on

Turn the machine off

There is a problem

and reinstall the

finisher again. Check

that the finisher cable

is connected

in the finisher unit.

Replace the color

toner cartridge with a

new one. (Page 11.4)

properly. If the

problem persists,

please call for

The lifespan of the

color toner cartridge

which the arrow

[xxx] toner is

empty. Replace

toner cartridge

This message

service.

appears when the

toner is completely

empty, and your

machine stops

printing. Replace the

toner cartridge with a

Samsung-genuine

toner cartridge.

Fuser error: [zzz].

Please turn off

then on

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for

indicates is reached.

There is a problem

in the fuser unit

working.

service.

Fuser unit is not

installed correctly.

Install it

The fuser unit is not

Install the fuser unit.

installed or correctly. Call for service.

[xxx] toner is low.

Order new toner

cartridge

The toner cartridge is

almost empty.

Ensure a

replacement

cartridge is in stock.

LSU error: [zzz].

Please turn off

then on

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for

There is a problem

in the control of LSU

unit.

DC motor does not

operate: [zzz].

Please turn off

then on

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for

There is a problem

in the control of DC

motor unit.

service.

12.12

Message

Meaning

Suggested solutions

Message

Meaning

Suggested solutions

Motor does not

operate: [zzz].

Please turn off

then on

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for

Paper Jam at the

top of duplex path

There is a problem

in the control of

motor unit.

Paper has jammed

during duplex

printing.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.9)

Paper Jam in exit

area

Paper has jammed

in the fuser area.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.9)

service.

Original paper

does not feed in

scanner

The lead edge of the Open the DADF cover

Paper jam in front

of finisher

Paper jammed in the Open the stacker

stacker.

document failed to

actuate the scan

sensor within the

correct time after

actuating the

and remove jammed

original. (Page 12.1)

door and remove

jammed paper by

lowering guide 1a or

1b.

registration sensor.

Paper Jam in MP

tray

Paper misfed from

multi-purpose tray

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.7)

Original paper is

too long for

scanner. Check

size

Oversizeddocument Open the DADF cover

or double-feeding of and remove the

originals.

Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper has jammed

in the feeding area

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.3 and

page 12.5)

jammed original.

(Page 12.1)

of the tray.

Check the document

size whether it is

supported.

Paper Jam in tray 2 Paper has jammed

in the feeding area

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.3 and

page 12.5)

of the tray.

(Page 15.1)

Paper Jam in tray

2(HCF)

Paper has jammed

in the feeding area

of the tray.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.3 and

page 12.5)

Original paper jam

in front of scanner

The originals are

jammed in DADF.

Open the DADF cover

and remove the

jammed original.

(Page 12.1)

Paper Jam in tray 3

Paper has jammed

in the feeding area

of the tray.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.3 and

page 12.5)

Original paper jam

in front of scanner

duplex path

Paper has jammed

during duplex

printing in the DADF.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.2)

Paper jam inside

finisher

Paper jammed in the Open the stacker

stacker.

door and remove

jammed paper by

lowering guide 1a or

1b.

Original paper jam

inside of scanner

The lead edge of the Open the DADF cover

document failed to

actuate the gate

sensor within the

correct time after

actuating the scan

sensor.

and remove the

jammed original.

(Page 12.1)

Paper jam inside

finisher’s duplex

Paper jammed in the Open the stacker

stacker.

door and remove

jammed paper by

lowering guide 1a or

1b.

When the machine

is on, jammed paper

is detected in the

DADF.

Paper Jam inside

of duplex path

Paper has jammed

during duplex

printing.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.9)

Original paper jam

while reversing

paper in scanner

The lead edge of the Lift up the document

document failed to

actuate the duplex

sensor within the

correct time when

the document was

fed the wrong way.

input traz and remove

the jammed original.

(Page 12.1)

Paper Jam inside

of machine

Paper has jammed

in the registration

area.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.8)

Scanner locking

switch is locked or

another problem

occurred

The CCD (Charged

Couple Device) lock (Page 1.3) Or turn off

has been locked.

The CCD does not

detect its home

Unlock the CCD lock.

the machine and on

again. Try again. If

the problem persists,

call for service.

Paper jam at exit

of finisher

Paper jammed in the Pull jammed paper

stacker exit part.

from the stacker exit.

Paper Jam at the

bottom of duplex

path

Paper has jammed

during duplex

printing.

Clear the jam.

(Page 12.9)

location or move.

12.13

Message

Meaning

Suggested solutions

Message

Meaning

Suggested solutions

Sensor failure:

[zzz]. Call for

service

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for

Waste tank is full.

Replace it

The life span of the

waste toner

container has

expired and the

printer will stop

printing until a new

waste toner

container is placed

into the printer.

Replace a waste

toner container with a

Samsung-genuine

waste toner

container.

(Page 11.7)

There is a problem

in the sensor signal.

service.

Shake [xxx] toner

cartridge

The toner supply is

low.

Thoroughly roll the

new cartridge five or

six times to distribute

the toner evenly

inside the cartridge.

(Page 11.3)

USE AUXILIARY

ACCESS

The credit is not

enough to access

the job according to

Foreign Device.

Insert credit into the

Foreign Device.

Staple cartridge is

empty. Replace it

Stapler is run out.

Order Staple

Cartridge.

(Page 13.2) And

replace it.

(Page 14.2)

Staple cartridge is

not installed.

Install it in finisher

The staple cartridge Install the staple

is not installed.

cartridge following

the steps explained

on the back of the

finisher door.

(Page 14.2) If you

want to continue the

print job and

disregard of this error

message, go to

Admin Setting to

adjust the option.

(Page 10.2)

System error:

[zzz]. Please turn

off then on

Turn the machine off

and turn it on again. If

the problem persists,

please call for

There is a problem

in the system

operation.

service.

This IP address

conflicts with an IP

address already in

use. Check it

The IP address is

used in other place

elsewhere.

Check the IP address

or obtain a new IP

address.

Too much paper in

finisher stacker.

Remove printed

paper

The stacker is full of Remove printouts

printouts.

from the stacker.

Too much paper in

output bin tray.

Remove printed

paper

The printed papers

are full on the output from the output tray.

tray.

Remove printed outs

Transfer belt is not

valid for this

machine. Check

user? guide

The transfer belt of

Install the a

the machine is not for Samsung-genuine

your machine.

part designed for your

machine.

Transfer belt unit

is worn. Replace it

The life of the

transfer belt expires

totally.

Replace the part with

a new one. Call for

service.

12.14

Condition

Suggested solutions

Solving other problems

The paper keeps

jamming.

• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove

excess paper from the tray. If you are printing

on special materials, use the multi-purpose

tray.

The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the

recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the

problem is corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.

• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use

only paper that meets the specifications

required by the machine. (Page 4.3)

• There may be debris inside the machine.

Open the front cover and remove the debris.

• If an original does not feed into the machine,

the DADF rubber pad may need to be

replaced. Contact a service representative.

Touch screen problem

Condition

Suggested solutions

The touch screen • Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.

does not show

anything.

• Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If

the problem persists, please call for service.

Transparencies

stick together in

the paper exit.

Use only transparencies specifically designed

for laser printers. Remove each transparency as

it exits from the machine.

Paper feeding problems

Condition

Suggested solutions

Envelopes skew

or fail to feed

correctly.

Ensure that the paper guides are against both

sides of the envelopes.

Paper is jammed

during printing.

Clear the paper jam. (Page 12.3)

Paper sticks

together.

• Ensure that there is not too much paper in the

tray. The tray can hold up to 520 sheets of

paper, depending on the thickness of the

paper.

• Make sure that you are using the correct type

of paper. (Page 4.3)

• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan

the paper.

• Humid conditions may cause some paper to

stick together.

Printing problems

Condition

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

The

The machine is not

receiving power.

Check the power cord

connections. Check the

power switch and the power

source.

machine

does not

print.

The machine is not

selected as the

default printer.

Select Samsung CLX-8380

Series PCL 6 or Samsung

CLX-8380 Series PS as your

default printer in your

Windows.

Multiple sheets of • Different types of paper may be stacked in the

paper do not

feed.

tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and

weight.

• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,

clear the paper jam. (Page 12.3)

Check the machine for the following:

• The side cover is not closed. Close the side cover.

• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (Page 12.3)

• No paper is loaded. Load paper. (Page 4.7)

• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not

installed. Install the toner cartridge or imaging unit.

If a system error occurs, contact your service

representative.

Paper does not

feed into the

machine.

• Remove any obstructions from inside the

machine.

• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove

paper from the tray and reload it correctly.

• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove

excess paper from the tray.

• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that

meets the specifications required by the

machine. (Page 4.3)

• If an original does not feed into the machine,

the DADF rubber pad may require to be

replaced. Contact a service representative.

The connection cable Disconnect the printer cable

between the

and reconnect it.

computer and the

machine is not

connected properly.

12.15

Condition

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

Condition

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

The

The connection cable If possible, attach the cable

Half the

page is

blank.

The page orientation

setting may be

incorrect.

Change the page orientation

in your application. See the

printer driver help screen.

machine

does not

print.

between the

computer and the

to another computer that is

working properly and print a

machine is defective. job. You can also try using a

different printer cable.

The paper size and

the paper size

settings do not

match.

Ensure that the paper size in

the printer driver settings

matches the paper in the

tray.

(continued)

The port setting is

incorrect.

Check the Windows printer

setting to make sure that the

print job is sent to the correct

port. If the computer has

more than one port, make

sure that the machine is

Or, ensure that the paper

size in the printer driver

settings matches the paper

selection in the software

application settings you use.

attached to the correct one.

The machine may be Check the printer properties

The

The printer cable is

loose or defective.

Disconnect the printer cable

and reconnect. Try a print job

that you have already printed

successfully. If possible,

attach the cable and the

machine to another computer

and try a print job that you

know works. Finally, try a

new printer cable.

configured

incorrectly.

to ensure that all of the print

settings are correct.

machine

prints, but

the text is

wrong,

garbled, or

incomplete.

The printer driver

may be incorrectly

installed.

Repair the printer software.

See Software section.

The machine is

malfunctioning.

Check the display message

on the control panel to see if

the machine is indicating a

system error. Contact a

The wrong printer

driver was selected.

Check the application’s

printer selection menu to

ensure that your machine is

selected.

service representative.

The document size is Get more hard disk space

so big that the hard

disk space of the

computer is not

enough to access the

print job.

and print the document

again.

The software

application is

malfunctioning.

Try printing a job from

another application.

The operating system Exit Windows and reboot the

is malfunctioning.

computer. Turn the machine

off and then back on again.

The

The paper option that For many software

machine

selectsprint printer properties

materials

from the

wrong

was selected in the

applications, the paper

source selection is found

under the Paper tab within

the printer properties. Select

the correct paper source.

See the printer driver help

screen.

Pagesprint, The toner cartridge is Redistribute the toner, if

but they are defective or out of

necessary.

may be incorrect.

blank.

toner.

If necessary, replace the

toner cartridge.

paper

source.

The file may have

blank pages.

Check the file to ensure that

it does not contain blank

pages.

A print job

isextremely complex.

slow.

The job may be very

Reduce the complexity of the

page or try adjusting the print

quality settings.

Some parts, such as

the controller or the

board, may be

Contact a service

representative.

defective.

12.16

Printing quality problems

Condition

Possible cause

Suggested solutions

If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,

you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear

the problem.

PDF file

does not

correctly-

some parts

are missing

in the

graphics,

text or

illustrations.

Incompatibility

between the PDF file

and the Acrobat

products.

Printing the PDF file as an

image may enable the file to

print. Turn on Print As Image

from the Acrobat printing

options.

Condition

Suggested solutions

Note: It will take longer to

print when you print a PDF

file as an image.

Light or faded print

If a vertical white streak or faded area appears

on the page:

• The toner supply is low. You may be able to

temporarily extend the toner cartridge life. If

this does not improve the print quality, install

a new toner cartridge.

• The paper may not meet paper

specifications; for example, the paper may

be too moist or rough. (Page 4.3)

• If the entire page is light, the print resolution

setting is too low or the toner save mode is

on. Adjust the print resolution and turn the

toner save mode off. See the help screen of

the printer driver and refer to Software

section, respectively.

Before

printing, the

machine

emits vapor

near the

output tray.

Using damp paper

can cause vapor

during printing.

This is not a problem. Just

keep printing.

Your

The oil used to

protect the fuser is

evaporating.

After printing about 100 color

pages, there will be no more

smell. It is a temporary issue.

machine

has an odd

smell

• A combination of faded or smeared defects

may indicate that the toner cartridge needs

cleaning. Contact a service representative.

• The surface of the LSU part inside the

machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,

contact a service representative.

duringinitial

use.

The print

quality of

photos is

not good.

Images are

not clear.

The resolution of the

photo is very low.

Reduce the photo size. If you

increase the photo size in the

software application, the

resolution will be reduced.

Toner specks

• The paper may not meet specifications; for

example, the paper may be too moist or

rough. (Page 4.3)

• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the

inside of your machine. Contact a service

representative.

The

Paper size and paper

size setting do not

match.

Set the correct paper size in

the Custom in the Paper tab

in the printer propeties. See

machine

does not

printspecial

sized paper

such as a

billing

Software section

• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact

a service representative.

paper.

Dropouts

If faded areas, generally rounded, occur

randomly on the page:

• A single sheet of paper may be defective.

Try reprinting the job.

• The moisture content of the paper is uneven

or the paper has moist spots on its surface.

Try a different brand of paper. (Page 4.3)

• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing

processes can cause some areas to reject

toner. Try a different kind or brand of paper.

• If these steps do not correct the problem,

contact a service representative.

12.17

Condition

Suggested solutions

Condition

Suggested solutions

White Spots

White spots appears on the page:

Vertical repetitive

defects

If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side

of the page at even intervals:

• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from

a paper falls to the inner devices within the

machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.

Clean the inside of your machine.

(Page 11.2) Contact a service

representative.

• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact

a service representative.

• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a

repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a

cleaning sheet through several times to

clean the cartridge; contact a service

representative. After the printout, if you still

have the same problems, remove the

imaging unit and then, install a new one.

(Page 11.4)

• Parts of the machine may have toner on

them. If the defects occur on the back of the

page, the problem will likely correct itself

after a few more pages.

Vertical lines

If black vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The drum inside the printer has probably

been scratched. Remove the imaging unit

and install a new one. (Page 11.5)

• The fusing assembly may be damaged.

Contact a service representative.

If white vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The surface of the LSU part inside the

machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.

Contact a service representative.

Background scatter Background scatter results from bits of toner

randomly distributed on the printed page.

• The paper may be too damp. Try printing

with a different batch of paper. Do not open

packages of paper until necessary so that

the paper does not absorb too much

moisture.

If vertical streaks appear on the page:

• The surface of the scanner glass and its

white sheet may be dirty. Clean these unit.

See 11.2 . If this problem persists, contact a

service representative.

• If background scatter occurs on an

envelope, change the printing layout to

avoid printing over areas that have

overlapping seams on the reverse side.

Printing on seams can cause problems.

• If background scatter covers the entire

surface area of a printed page, adjust the

print resolution through your software

application or in printer properties.

Color or Black

background

If the amount of background shading becomes

unacceptable:

• Change to a lighter weight paper. (Page 4.3)

• Check the environmental conditions: very

dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level

of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can

increase the amount of background

shading.

• Remove the old imaging unit and then,

install a new one. (Page 11.4)

Misformed

characters

• If characters are improperly formed and

producing hollow images, the paper stock

may be too slick. Try different paper.

(Page 4.3)

• If characters are improperly formed and

producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit

may need service. Contact a service

representative.

Toner smear

• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a

service representative.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a

new one. (Page 11.4)

12.18

Condition

Page skew

Suggested solutions

Condition

Loose toner

Suggested solutions

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

• Ensure that the paper or other material is

loaded correctly and the guides are not too

tight or too loose against the paper stack.

• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a

service representative.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a

new one. (Page 11.4)

• If the problem persists, the machine may

require repair. Contact a service

representative.

Curl or wave

• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality. Both high

temperature and humidity can cause paper

curl. (Page 4.3)

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Character Voids

Character voids are white areas within parts of

characters that should be solid black:

• If you are using transparencies, try another

type of transparency. Because of the

composition of transparencies, some

character voids are normal.

• You may be printing on the wrong surface of

the paper. Remove the paper and turn it

around.

• The paper may not meet paper

specifications. (Page 4.3)

Wrinkles or creases • Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.

• Check the paper type and quality.

(Page 4.3)

Horizontal stripes

If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears

appear:

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

• The imaging unit may be installed

improperly. Remove the cartridge and

reinsert it.

• The imaging unit may be defective. Remove

the toner cartridge and install a new one.

(Page 11.4)

Back of printouts

are dirty

Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of

the machine. Contact a service

representative.

• If the problem persists, the machine may

require repair. Contact a service

representative.

Curl

If the printed paper is curled or paper does not

feed into the machine:

• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also

try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.

Solid Color or

Black pages

• The imaging unit may not be installed

properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert

it.

• The imaging unit may be defective and need

replacing. Remove the imaging unit and

install a new one. (Page 11.4)

An unknown image

repetitively appears altitude of 1,000 m (3,281ft) or above. The

Your machine is probably being used at an

on the next few

sheets or loose

toner, light print, or

contamination

occurs.

high altitude may affect the print quality from

loose toner or light imaging. You can set this

option through Printer Settings Utility or the

Printer Tab in printer driver’s properties. See

page 3.5.

• The machine may require repair. Contact a

service representative.

12.19

Copying problems

Scanning problems

Condition

Suggested solutions

Condition

Suggested solutions

Copies are too light Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or

The scanner does • Make sure that you place the original to be

or too dark.

lighten the backgrounds of copies.

not work.

scanned face down on the scanner glass, or

face up in the DADF.

• There may not be enough available memory

to hold the document you want to scan. Try

the Prescan function to see if that works. Try

lowering the scan resolution rate.

Smears, lines,

marks, or spots

appears on copies.

• If the defects are on the original, press Light

and Dark arrows to lighten the background

of your copies.

• If there are no defects on the original, clean

the scan unit. (Page 11.2)

• Check that the printer cable is connected

properly.

Copy image is

skewed.

• Ensure that the original is face down on the

scanner glass or face up in the DADF.

• Check that the copy paper is loaded

correctly.

• Make sure that the printer cable is not

defective. Switch the cable with a known

good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.

• Check that the scanner is configured

correctly. Check scan setting in the SmarThru

Configuration or the application you want to

use to make certain that the scanner job is

being sent to the correct port.

Blank copies print

out.

Ensure that the original is face down on the

scanner glass or face up in the DADF.

Image rubs off the

copy easily.

• Replace the paper in the tray with paper

from a new package.

• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper in

the machine for extended periods of time.

The unit scans

very slowly.

• Check if the machine is printing received

data. If so, scan the document after the

received data has been printed.

• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.

• Communication speed slows in scan mode

because of the large amount of memory

required to analyze and reproduce the

scanned image. Set your computer to the

ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It

will help to increase the speed. For details

about how to set BIOS, refer to your

computer user’s guide.

Frequent copy

paper jams occur.

• Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in

the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with a

fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper guides,

if necessary.

• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper

weight. 75 g/m (20 lb bond) paper is

recommended.

• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy

paper remaining in the machine after a

paper jam has been cleared.

Toner cartridge

produces fewer

copies than

expected before

running out of

toner.

• Your originals may contain pictures, solids,

or heavy lines. For example, your originals

may be forms, newsletters, books, or other

documents that use more toner.

• The machine may be turned on and off

frequently.

• The scanner lid may be left open while

copies are being made.

12.20

Fax problems (optional)

Condition

Suggested solutions

Message appears • There may be a copying or printing job in

Condition

Suggested solutions

on your computer

screen:

progress. Try your job again when that job is

finished, try your job again.

The machine is not • Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.

working, there is no

display and the

buttons are not

working.

• Ensure that there is power being supplied to

the electrical outlet.

• The selected port is currently being used.

Restart your computer and try again.

• The printer cable may be improperly

connected or the power may be off.

• The scanner driver is not installed or the

operating environment is not set up properly.

• Ensure that the machine is properly

connected and the power is on, then restart

your computer.

• “Device can't be

set to the H/W

mode you want.”

• “Port is being

used by another

program.”

• “Port is

Disabled.”

• “Scanner is busy

receiving or

printing data.

When the

No dial tone

sounds.

• Check that the phone line is properly

connected.

• Check that the phone socket on the wall is

working by plugging in another phone.

• The USB cable may be improperly connected

or the power may be off.

The numbers

stored in memory

do not dial

Make sure that the numbers are stored in

memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book.

(Page 6.6)

current job is

completed, try

again.”

• “Invalid handle.”

• “Scanning has

failed.”

correctly.

The original does

not feed into the

machine.

• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and

you are inserting it in correctly. Check that

the original is the right size, not too thick or

thin.

• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.

• The DADF rubber pad may need to be

replaced. Contact a service representative.

Network Scan problems

Faxes are not

received

automatically.

• The receiving mode should be set to Fax.

• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.

• Check to see if the display shows any error

message. If it does, clear the problem.

Condition

Suggested solutions

I cannot find a

scanned image

file.

You can check the destination for the scanned file

on the Advanced page in the Network Scan

program’s Properties screen.

The machine does • Make sure that the original is loaded in the

I cannot find the • Check if the scanned file is on your computer.

not send.

DADF or on the scanner glass.

scanned image

file after

scanning.

• Check Send image immediately to the

specified folder using an associated default

application on the Advanced page in the

Properties screen of the Network Scan

program to open the scanned image

immediately after scanning.

• Check the fax machine you are sending to,

to see if it can receive your fax.

The incoming fax

has blank spaces

or is of poor quality.

• The fax machine sending you the fax may be

faulty.

• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.

• Check your machine by making a copy.

• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace

the toner cartridge, referring to page 11.4.

I forgot my ID.

Check your ID in the Server page in the

Properties screen of the Network Scan program.

I cannot view

the Help file.

To view the Help file, you need to have Internet

Explorer 4 service pack 2 or above.

Stretched words

appear on an

incoming fax.

The fax machine sending the fax had a

temporary document jam.

I cannot use the Check your operating system. Supported

Samsung

Network Scan

Manager

operating systems are Windows 2000/XP/2003/

Vista.

There are lines on

the originals you

sent.

Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.

(Page 11.2)

The machine dials

a number, but the

The other fax machine may be turned off, out

of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.

connection with the Speak with the other machine operator and ask

other fax machine

fails.

her/him to solve out the problem.

12.21

Common PostScript problems

Condition

Suggested solutions

The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when

several printer languages are being used.

Faxes do not store

in memory.

There may not be enough memory space to

store the fax. If the display shows the low

memory message, delete any faxes you no

longer need from the memory and then try to

store the fax again. Please call for service.

Note

To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when

PostScript errors occur, open the Print Options window and click

the desired selection next to the PostScript errors section.

Blank areas

You may have chosen the wrong paper

settings in the user option setting. For details

about paper settings. (Page 4.9)

appear at the

bottom of each

page or on other

pages, with a small

strip of text at the

top.

Problem

Possible Cause

Solution

PostScript file

cannot be

printed.

The PostScript

driver may not be

installed correctly.

• Install the PostScript

driver, referring to

Software section.

• Print a configuration

page and verify that the

PS version is available

for printing.

• If the problem persists,

contact a service

Common Windows problems

representative.

Condition

Suggested solutions

“Limit Check

Error” message

appears.

The print job was

too complex.

You might need to reduce

the complexity of the page

or install more memory.

“File in Use”

message appears

during installation.

Exit all software applications. Remove all

software from the StartUp Group, then restart

Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.

A PostScript

error page prints. not be PostScript.

The print job may

Make sure that the print job

is a PostScript job. Check

to see whether the

software application

expected a setup or

“General

Close all other applications, reboot Windows

and try printing again.

Protection Fault”,

“Exception OE”,

“Spool32”, or

“Illegal Operation”

messages appear.

PostScript header file to be

sent to the machine.

“Fail To Print”, “A

printer timeout

error occurred.”

messages appear.

These messages may appear during printing.

Just keep waiting until the machine finishes

printing. If the message appears in standby

mode or after printing has been completed,

check the connection and/or whether an error

has occurred.

The optional tray

is not selected in

the driver.

The printer driver

has not been

configured to

recognize the

optional tray.

Open the PostScript driver

properties, select the

Device Settings tab, and

set the Tray option of the

Installable Options section

to Installed

Note

Window/

The machine does not

Try to print with the latest

Adobe Reader program or

print with turning on "Print

as Image" option from

Acrobat printing options. It

might take longer to print

when you print a PDF file

as an image.

Macintosh staple correctly when

printing more than one

copy from Acrobat

Refer to Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista User’s Guide

that came with your PC for further information on Windows error

messages.

Reader with a collate

option.

Linux

The machine does not

staple correctly when

printing more than one

copy with a collate option

Turning off collation options

on applications (including

CUPS pstops collation option)

may solve this problem. If you

want to use the collation

option, go to printer driver’s

advanced option and turn the

collation on.

12.22

Common Linux problems

Problem

Possible Cause and Solution

Problem

Possible Cause and Solution

The machine does

not appear on the

scanners list.

• Check if your machine is attached to your

computer. Make sure that it is connected

properly via the USB port and is turned on.

• Check if the scanner driver for your machine is

installed in your system. Open the Unified

Driver configuration tool, switch to Scanner

configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure

that the window lists a driver with a name

corresponding to your machine's name. Check

if the port is not busy. Since functional

components of MFP (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access to different

“consumer” applications using the same port is

possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one

of them is allowed to gain control over the

device at a time. The other “consumer” will

encounter a “device busy” response. This

usually happens while starting the scan

procedure, and an appropriate message box

appears.

• To identify the source of the problem, you

should open ports configuration and select the

port assigned to your scanner. The port symbol

/dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation

displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1

relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /

dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /

dev/mfp4 respectively, and so forth

sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can

see if the port is occupied with some other

application. If this is the case, you should wait

for completion of the current job or you should

press the Release port button, if you are sure

that the port owner is not functioning properly.

The machine does not The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)

print.

version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-

1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet Printing

Protocol) printing.

• Check if the printer driver is installed in your

system. Open the Unified Driver configuration

tool and switch to the Printers tab in the

Printers configuration window to look at the list

of available printers. Make sure that your

machine is displayed on the list. If not, use the

Add new printer wizard to set up your device.

• Check if the printer has started. Open Printers

configuration and select your machine on the

printers list. Look at the description in the

Selected printer pane. If its status contains

“(stopped)” string, please, press the Start

button. After that, normal operation of the

printer should be restored. The “stopped”

status might be activated when some

problems in printing occurred. For instance,

this could be an attempt to print documents

when the port is claimed by a scanning

application.

• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional

components of MFP (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access for different

“consumer” application to the same port is

possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one

of them is allowed to gain control over the

device at a time. The other “consumer” will

encounter “device busy” response. You should

open the ports configuration and select the

port assigned to your printer. In the Selected

port pane you can see if the port is occupied

by some other application. If this is the case,

you should wait for completion of the current

job or you should press the Release port

button, if you are sure that the owner is not

functioning properly.

• Check if your application has special print

options such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified

in the command line parameter then remove it

to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select

“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit the command

line parameter in the command item.

• The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)

version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2 (cups-

1.1.21) has a problem with ipp (Internet

Printing Protocol) printing.Use the socket

printing instead of ipp or install later version of

CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).

12.23

Problem

Possible Cause and Solution

Problem

Possible Cause and Solution

The machine does

not scan.

• Check if a document is loaded into the

machine.

Some color images

come out all black.

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.05) when the base color

space of the document is indexed color space

and it is converted through CIE color space.

Because Postscript uses CIE color space for

Color Matching System, you should upgrade

Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU

Ghostscript version 7.06 or later. You can find

recent Ghostscript versions at

• Check if your machine is connected to the

computer. Make sure it is connected properly if

an I/O error is reported while scanning.

• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional

components of MFP (printer and scanner)

share the same I/O interface (port), the

situation of simultaneous access for different

“consumer” applications to the same port is

possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one

of them is allowed to gain control over the

device at a time. The other “consumer” will

encounter “device busy” response. This

usually happens while starting the scan

procedure, and an appropriate message box

will be displayed.

To identify the source of the problem, you

should open ports configuration and select the

port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /

dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation

displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1

relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /

dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /

dev/mfp4 respectively and so forth

www.ghostscript.com.

Some color images

come out in

unexpected color.

This is a known bug in Ghostscript (until GNU

Ghostscript version 7.xx) when the base color

space of the document is indexed RGB color

space and it is converted through CIE color

space. Because Postscript uses CIE color space

for Color Matching System, you should upgrade

Ghostscript on your system to at least GNU

Ghostscript version 8.xx or later. You can find

recent Ghostscript versions at

www.ghostscript.com.

The machine does

not print whole pages printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of

and its output is half

page printed.

It is a known problem that occurs when a color

Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to

bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug

688252.

sequentially. In the Selected port pane you can

see if the port is occupied by some other

application. If this is the case, you should wait

for completion of the current job or you should

press the Release port button, if you are sure

that the port owner is not functioning properly.

The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.

8.52 or above. Download the latest version of

AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/

projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this

problem.

I cannot scan via

Gimp Front-end.

• Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device

dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you

should install the Xsane plug-in for Gimp on

your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in

package for Gimp on Linux distribution CDs or

on the Gimp home page. For detailed

information, refer to Help for Linux distribution

CD or Gimp Front-end application.

If you wish to use an other kinds of scan

applications, refer to the Help for application.

I encounter error

“Cannot open port

device file” when

printing a document.

Please avoid changing print job parameters (via

LPR GUI, for example) while a print job is in

progress. Known versions of CUPS server cut off

the print jobs whenever print options are changed

and then try to restart the job from the beginning.

Since Unified Linux Driver locks port while

printing, the abrupt termination of the driver

keeps the port locked and therefore unavailable

for subsequent print jobs. If this situation

occurred, try to release the port.

12.24

Common Macintosh problems

Problem

Suggested solutions

PDF file does not print

correctly-some parts are

missing in the graphics,

text or illustrations.

Incompatibility between the PDF file and

the Acrobat products.

Printing the PDF file as an image may

enable the file to print. Turn on Print As

Image from the Acrobat printing options.

Note: It will take longer to print when

you print a PDF file as an image.

The document has

printed, but the print job

has not disappeared from

the spooler in

Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or

higher.

Mac OS 10.3.2.

Some letters are not

displayed normally

during the cover page

printing.

This problem is caused because Mac

OS cannot find the font during the cover

page printing.

Alphanumeric characters, in the Billing

Info field, are only allowed for printing on

the cover page. Other characters will be

broken on the printout.

When printing a

Make sure that the resolution setting in

your printer driver matches the one in

Acrobat Reader.

document in Macintosh

with Acrobat Reader 6.0

or higher, colors print

incorrectly.

12.25

Caution

13 Ordering supplies and

accessories

This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and

accessories available for your machine.

When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must

be purchased in the same country where the machine was

purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be

incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges

and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.

This chapter includes:

•

Supplies

Accessories

How to purchase

You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s

performance and capacity.

Note

The following accessories are available for your machine:

The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact

your sales representatives whether the part you want is available

in your country.

Accessory

Description

Part number

Memory module Extand your machine’s CLP-MEM103: 512 MB

memory capacity.

Supplies

Fax option kit

This kit lets you use

your machine as a fax

machine.

SCX-FAX210

When the toner runs out or, the life span of the supplies expires you can

order the following types of toner cartridges and supplies for your

machine:

Note: After installing

the kit, you have to set

up your machine to

activate this machine.

(See Page 14.3)

Type

Yield

Part number

Toner cartridge

CLX-K8380A (Black)

Average continuous

black cartridge yield:

20,000 standard

pages.

Optional tray 2/3 If you are experiencing SCX-S6555A

frequent paper supply

problems, you can

attach up to two

additonal 520 sheet

trays. You can print

documents in various

sizes and types of print

materials in each tray.

CLX-C8380A (Cyan)

Average continuous

colored cartridge yield:

15,000 standard pages

(Yellow/Magenta/

Cyan)

CLX-M8380A

(Magenta)

CLX-Y8380A (Yellow)

CLX-R838XK (Black)

CLX-R838XC (Cyan)

Imaging unit

Approx. 30,000 pages

High Capacity

Feeder

If you are frequently

experiencing paper

supply problems, you

can attach an

additional 2,100 sheet

tray.

SCX-HCF100

CLX-R838XM

(Magenta)

CLX-R838XY (Yellow)

CLX-W8380A

Stand

You can place the

machine on the

ergonomically-

• Tall Stand: SCX-

DSK10T

• Short Stand: SCX-

DSK10S

Note: If you do not use

the optional tray then

Tall Stand is

recommended. In case

you add two optional

trays, use Short Stand.

Waste toner

container

Approx.

48,000 images

designed cabinet which

lets you reach the

machine conveniently.

Also, you can easily

move the cabinet with

its wheels, if necessary,

and store

miscellaneous items

like papers into the

cabinet.

a. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

b. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in

full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4

images.

13.1

<Ordering supplies and accesso-

Accessory

Stacker &

Stapler

(Finisher)

Description

500 sheets

Part number

SCX-FIN10S

How to purchase

To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local

Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or

visit www.samsung.com/supplies and select your country/region to obtain

information on calling for technical support.

Staple Cartridge 3 x 5,000 staples per

package, covers

SCX-STP000

maximum thickness of

50 sheets, 1 staple

position.

FDI (Foreign

Interface

Device) kit

This card is installed

inside the machine to

allow a third party

SCX-KIT20F

device such as a coin

operated device or a

card reader. Those

devices allow the pay-

for-print service on

your machine.

SmarThru

Workflow

Windows 2000/XP/

2003. This feature lets

you send additional

information along with

the scanned document

to a specified network

location.

SCX-KIT11S

13.2

<Ordering supplies and accesso-

Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.

14Installing accessories

Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet

most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user may have

different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories

available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.

This chapter includes:

•

Precautions to take when installing accessories

Installing a memory module

Replacing the Stapler

Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit

control board cover

Precautions to take when installing accessories

Take out a new memory module from the plastic bag.

Disconnect the power cord

Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory

module on the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the

notches of the module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.

Never remove the control board cover while the power is being supplied on.

To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the

power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external

accessories.

Discharge static electricity

The control board and internal accessories (network interface or DIMM) are

sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or removing any internal

accessories, discharge static electricity from your body by touching

something metal, such as the metal back plate on any device plugged into a

grounded power source. If you walk round before finishing the installation,

repeat this procedure to discharge any static electricity again.

Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a

'click'.

Installing a memory module

Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this

memory module slot to install additional memory.

The order information is provided for optional memory module. (Page 13.1)

Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.

Note

The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match

those on an actual DIMM and its slot.

Replace the control board cover.

Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine

on.

14.1

Pull the stapler unit out.

Activating the added memory in the PS printer

properties

After installing the memory DIMM, you need to select it in the printer

properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.

Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your

computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see

Software section.

Click the Windows Start menu.

For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.

For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.

Select the Samsung CLX-8380 Series PS printer.

Click the right mouse button on the machine icon and select

Properties.

Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.

For Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista, select Device Settings.

Select the amount of memory you installed from Printer Memory in

the Installable Options section.

Click OK.

Replacing the Stapler

Unpack the new staple cartridge.

When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the

staple cartridge appears on the display screen.

Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.

Open the finisher cover.

Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.

Close the finisher cover.

14.2

Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax

option kit

After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use

this function.

Press Machine Setup on the control panel.

Press Admin Setting.

When the login message appears, enter password with number

keypad and press OK. (Page 3.5)

Press the General tab.

Press the Country.

Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will

be changed automatically for your country.

14.3

Item

Description

• Standby mode: 43 dB(A)

• Printing mode: 54 dB(A)

• Copying mode: 57 dB(A)

15Specifications

Noise level

This chapter includes:

•

General specifications

Printer specifications

Boot-up time

• Less than 30 seconds (from sleep mode)

• Less than 120 seconds (from power off)

The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is

a lot in the HDD

Copier specifications

Scanner specifications

Facsimile specifications (optional)

Operating

environment

Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C (50° F to 89.6° F)

Humidity: 20% to 80% RH

General specifications

Display

800 x 480 7 inch WVGA Color graphic LCD with

Touch-Screen, 16 bit color.

Item

Description

• Toner cartridge

Average continuous black cartridge yield:

20,000 standard pages

Average continuous Yellow/Magenta/Cyan

cartridge yield: 15,000 standard pages

DADF Capacity

Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m (20 lb bond)

DADF document

size

• Width:

69 (2.7 inches) to 216 (8.5 inches) mm

Consumables

Life

• Length:

• Imaging unit

145 (5.7 inches) to 356 (14.0 inches) mm

Approx. 30,000 pages

Paper input

capacity

• Tray 1

• Waste toner container

Approx. 48,000 images

520 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

(20 lb bond)

Memory

Standard: 576 MB (512 MB main memory and 64

MB fixed memory)

• Multi-purpose tray

100 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

(20 lb bond)

Maximum: Expandable to 1088 MB

• Optional tray 2/3

520 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

(20 lb bond)

Slots: One available DIMM slot for expandable

memory.

External

dimension

(W x D x H)

606.8 x 575.0 x 815.5 mm (without optional

trays), 23.89 x 22.64 x 32.11 inches

• Optional High capacity tray

2,100 multi-page for plain paper 80 g/m

(20 lb bond)

Weight

(including

consumables)

71.5 Kg (157.63 lbs)

For details about paper input capacity, see

page 4.3

Paper output

capacity

• 500 sheets (face down)

• 500 sheets (optional stacker)

Package weight

Paper: 9.7 Kg ( 21.38 lbs), Plastic: 2.7 Kg (5.95

lbs)

Power rating

AC 110 - 127 V or AC 220 - 240 V

Fusing

180° C (356° F)

See the Rating label on the machine for the

correct voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of

current for your machine.

temperature

a. DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder): The machine with this feature

scans both sides of a paper.

b. Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779. Configuration tested: machine basic

installation, A4 paper, simplex printing.

c. May be affected by operating environment, printing interval, media type, and

media size.

d. It varies depending on the product configuration.

e. Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798.

f. Image counts are based on one color on each page. If you print documents in

full color (Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black), the image count will be added by 4

images.

Power

consumption

• Average operation mode: Less than 1000 W

• Power save mode: Less than 80 W

• Standby mode: Less than 196 W

• Power off mode: 1 W

Default time to

power save

mode from lower

power mode

30 Minutes

15.2

Printer specifications

Copier specifications

Item

Description

Item

Description

Copy speed

Up to 38 cpm in A4 (40 cpm in Letter)

Printing method

Color Laser Beam Printing

Printing speed

Up to 38 ppm in A4

(40 ppm in Letter)

First copy out

time

• From ready: Less than 13 seconds

• From coldboot: Less than 135 seconds

Duplex printing speed Up to 33 ppm in A4

(35 ppm in Letter)

Copy resolution

DADF

• Scan: Up to 300 x 300 dpi

First print out time

Black & White

(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)

• From ready: Less than 14 seconds

• From coldboot: Less than 135 seconds

• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)

Color

Scanner glass (Platen)

• From ready: Less than 14 seconds

• From coldboot: Less than 135 seconds

• Scan: Up to 600 x 600 dpi

(text, text/photo, magazine, photo)

Print resolution

Up to 9,600 x 600 dpi effective output (600 x

600 x 4 dpi)

• Print: Up to 600 x 600 dpi (text, text/photo, magazine)

Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (photo)

Printer language

PCL5ce, PCL6, PostScript 3, PDF Direct

V1.4

Zoom rate

• Scanner glass (Platen): 25 to 400%

• DADF: 25 to 200%

OS compatibility

• Windows 2000/XP/2003/Vista

• Various Linux OS

Multiple copies

1 to 999 copies

•

Mac OS X 10.3 ~ 10.5

a. SDMC: Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.

• High Speed USB 2.0

Interface

• Ethernet 10/100 Base TX

a. Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing

performance, application software, connect on method, media type, media

size, and job complexity.

b. Please visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software

version.

15.2

Scanner specifications

Facsimile specifications (optional)

Item

Description

Item

Compatibility

Description

Compatibility

TWAIN standard / WIA standard

ITU-T G3

Scanning method

DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD

(Charge Coupled Device) module

Applicable line

Public Switched Telephone Network

(PSTN) or behind PABX

Resolution

TWAIN

standard

Up to 600 x 600 dpi (Up to 4,800 x

4,800 dpi by software

enhancement)

Data coding

MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)

33.6 Kbps

Modem speed

Transmission speed

Maximum document length

Approx. 3 seconds/page

WIA standard

Up to 600 x 600 dpi

100, 200, 300 dpi

• Scanner glass: 356 mm (14

inches)

• DADF: 356 mm (14 inches)

Scan to USB

NetScan

100, 200, 300, 400, 600 dpi

Scan to Email

Scan to Server

Resolution

Black &

White

• Standard

Up to 203 x 98 dpi

• Fine

Up to 203 x 196 dpi

• Super Fine (Fine photo)

Up to 300 x 300 dpi

Up to 406 x 392 dpi

Network Scan File format

Effective scanning length

PDF, TIFF, JPEG

• Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7

inches)

• DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)

Up to 203 x 392 dpi (Rx only)

Effective scanning width

Color bit depth

Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)

Color

• Standard

Up to 200 x 200 dpi

• Fine

• Internal: 36 bits

• External: 24 bits

Up to 200 x 200 dpi

• Super Fine

Up to 200 x 200 dpi

Mono bit depth

Grayscale

• 1 bit for Linearity & Halftone

• 8 bits (External), 12 bits

(Internal) for Gray scale

Halftone

Memory

256 levels

HDD Stroe, 500 jobs

Up to 200 numbers

a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might

differ.

b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in scan

color.

Auto dialer (Speed Dial)

a. Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C" by ITU-T

No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.

b. Rx stands for receiving a fax.

15.2

CSV

16Glossary

Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used

to exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as

it is used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard

throughout the industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.

Note

The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by

understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing

as well as mentioned in this user's guide.

DADF

A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that

will automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that

the machine can scan on both sides of the paper.

ADF

Default

An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will

automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can

scan some amount of the paper at once.

The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its

box state, reset, or initialized.

DHCP

AppleTalk

A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server

networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration

parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally,

information required by the client host to participate on an IP

network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocation of IP

addresses to client hosts.

AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc

for computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh

(1984) and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP

networking.

BIT Depth

A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to

represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher

color depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of

bits increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically

large for a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome

or black and white.

DIMM

Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds

memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing

data, received fax data.

DNS

BMP

The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information

associated with domain names in a distributed database on

networks, such as the Internet.

A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft

Windows graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a

simple graphics file format on that platform.

Dot Matrix Printer

BOOTP

A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print

head that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact,

striking an ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a

typewriter.

Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to

obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the

bootstrap process of computers or operating systems running on

them. The BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of

addresses to each client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation'

computers to obtain an IP address prior to loading any advanced

operating system.

DPI

Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for

scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher

resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.

CCD

DRPD

Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the

scan job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD

module to prevent any damage when you move the machine.

Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone

company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line

to answer several different telephone numbers.

Collation

Duplex

Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When

collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing

additional copies.

A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that

the machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer

equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.

Control Panel

A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or

monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in

front of the machine.

Duty Cycle

Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer

performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan

limitation such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average

capacity of print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For

example, if the duty cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20

working days, a printer limits 2,400 pages a day.

Coverage

It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on

printing. For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper

has about 5% image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has

complicated images or lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher

and at the same time, a toner usage will be as much as the

coverage.

ECM

Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built

into Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects

and corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are

sometimes caused by telephone line noise.

16.1

Emulation

IEEE 1284

Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results

The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of

Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B"

refers to a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable

that attaches to the peripheral (for example, a printer).

as another.

An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different

system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.

Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which

is in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the

system being simulated, often considering its internal state.

Intranet

A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity,

and possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share

part of an organization's information or operations with its

employees. Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible

service, the internal website.

Ethernet

Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local

area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical

layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control

(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly

standardized as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread

LAN technology in use during the 1990s to the present.

IP address

An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices

use in order to identify and communicate with each other on a

network utilizing the Internet Protocol standard.

EtherTalk

IPM

A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer

networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is

now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.

The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a

printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a

printer can complete within one minute.

FDI

IPP

Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine

to allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card

reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your

machine.

The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for

printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and

so forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of

printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and

encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing

solution than older ones.

FTP

A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for

exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol

(such as the Internet or an intranet).

IPX/SPX

IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet

Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare

operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services

similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and SPX

having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for local

area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this purpose

(typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).

Fuser Unit

The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It

consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred

onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure

that the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is

warm when it comes out of a laser printer.

ISO

Gateway

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an

international standard-setting body composed of representatives

from national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and

commercial standards.

A connection between computer networks, or between a computer

network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or

a network that allows access to another computer or network.

Grayscale

ITU-T

A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image

when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are

represented by various shades of gray.

The International Telecommunication Union is an international

organization established to standardize and regulate international

radio and telecommunications. Its main tasks include

standardization, allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing

interconnection arrangements between different countries to allow

international phone calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates

telecommunication.

Halftone

An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of

dots. Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while

lighter areas consist of a smaller number of dots.

ITU-T No. 1 chart

Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile

transmissions.

HDD

Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard

disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded

data on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.

JBIG

Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression

standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for

compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be

used on other images.

IEEE

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an

international non-profit, professional organization for the

advancement of technology related to electricity.

16.2

JPEG

Originals

Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used

standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is

the format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the

World Wide Web.

The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or

text, etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce

others, but which is not itself copied or derived from something else.

OSI

LDAP

Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the

International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for

communications. OSI offers a standard, modular approach to

network design that divides the required set of complex functions

into manageable, self-contained, functional layers. The layers are,

from top to bottom, Application, Presentation, Session, Transport,

Network, Data Link and Physical.

The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking

protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over

TCP/IP.

LED

A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that

indicates the status of a machine.

PABX

MAC address

Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier

A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic

telephone switching system within a private enterprise.

associated with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit

identifier usually written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in

pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded

into a Network Interface Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as

an aid for routers trying to locate machines on large networks.

PCL

Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language

(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an

industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL

has been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and

page printers.

MFP

Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes

the following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a

printer, a copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.

PDF

Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format

developed by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional

documents in a device independent and resolution independent

format.

Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the

amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax

machines to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a

codebook-based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently

compress white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space,

this minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.

PostScript

PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming

language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing

areas. - that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.

MMR

Printer Driver

Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method

recommended by ITU-T T.6.

A program used to send commands and transfer data from the

computer to the printer.

Modem

Print Media

A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital

information, and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode

transmitted information.

The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which

can be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.

PPM

Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for

determining how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages

a printer can produce in one minute.

Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by

ITU-T T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next

line is compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the

differences are encoded and transmitted.

PRN file

An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with

the device driver using standard input/output system calls, which

simplifies many tasks.

NetWare

A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used

cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the

network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.

Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.

Protocol

A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,

communication, and data transfer between two computing

endpoints.

OPC

Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a

virtual image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer,

and it is usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.

See PostScript.

An exposing unit of a drum is slowly worn away by its usage of the

printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets

scratches from grits of a paper.

16.3

PSTN

URL

The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of

the world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on

industrial premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.

Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents

and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates

what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the

domain name where the resource is located.

Resolution

USB

The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The

higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.

Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the

USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and

peripherals. Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently

connect a single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.

SMB

Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to

share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications

between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-

process communication mechanism.

Watermark

A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that

appears lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were

first introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by

papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,

currency, and other government documents to discourage

counterfeiting.

SMTP

Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail

transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-

based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are

specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-

server protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the

server.

WIA

Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that

is originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can

be initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-

compliant scanner.

Subnet Mask

The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to

determine which part of the address is the network address and

which part is the host address.

TCP/IP

The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol

(IP); the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol

stack on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.

TCR

Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each

transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of

pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after

failed transmissions.

TIFF

Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped

image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from

scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the

characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible

and platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have

been made by various image processing applications.

Toner Cartridge

A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner.

Toner is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which

forms the text and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted

by the heat of the fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.

TWAIN

An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-

compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be

initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft

Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.

UNC Path

Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access

network shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The

format of a UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional

directory>

16.4

INDEX

time & date 10.4

transparencies 5.7

copy setup 10.4

country setup 10.4

admin setting 10.1

email address

altitude adjustment 10.3

answering machine/fax 6.4

authentication

entering email addresses to input field 7.5

Global 7.5

Group 7.5

network accounting 10.7

Individual 7.5

storing 7.5

erasing background

copying 5.7

faxing 6.6

printing a report 10.2 10.9

setting up 3.5

10.2

DADF

auto center 5.8

cover 1.3

input tray 1.3

output tray 1.3

width guides 1.3

darkness

scanning 7.9 9.4

erasing punch hole 5.7

error correction mode 10.4

error message 12.11

Book copy 5.6

copying 5.4

faxing 6.6

extension telephone 6.5

scanning 7.9

9.4

date & time 3.5 10.2

CCD Lock 1.3

printing date&time in copied out 10.2

checking stored document 11.2

cleaning

10.4

fax option kit

default settings 3.6

altitude adjustment 10.3

changing the default settings 3.6

energy saver 10.3

language 10.2

enabling option feature after installing the

kit 14.3

inside 11.2

outside 11.2

scan unit 11.2

Clear 1.5

Clear All 1.5

Clone copy 5.6

collated 5.4

ordering 1.2

fax receiving

13.1

changing the receive mode 6.4

extension telephone 6.5

in answering machine/fax 6.4

in memory 6.5

receiving in duplex 6.5

secure receiving 6.5

loading paper 3.6

machine test 10.3

measurements 10.2

output option 10.3

setting a fax header 6.2

sound 10.3

supplies management 10.3

system timeout 10.2

tray management 10.3

tray setting 3.6

color mode

faxing 6.6

scanning 7.8

9.4

1.5

fax sending

control panel 1.3

automatic resending 6.3

delay sending 6.3

duplex sending 6.2

redialing the last number 6.3

sending a fax 6.2

sending a fax manually 6.3

sending a priority fax 6.4

setting a fax header 6.2

copy

copying 5.2

covers 5.7

duplex copy 5.3

erasing background 5.7

erasing edge 5.7

ID stamp 10.4

making a booklet 5.6

page number 10.4

poster 5.5

reduce/enlarge 5.3

shifting margin 5.8

solving copy problems 12.20

the size of the originals 5.2

display screen 1.5

driver

feature 2.2

installation 3.2

duplex

fax setup 10.4

faxing

color mode 6.6

copying 5.3

faxing 6.5

scanning 7.8

9.3

darkness 6.6

duplex 6.5

enabling the fax kit option 10.7 14.3

erasing background 6.6

original type 6.6

phonebook 6.6

printing a fax report 11.1

resolution 6.6

solving faxing problems 12.21

keyboard 3.7

OCR 7.9

9.5

On Hook Dial 1.5

hardware 1.5

sending a fax 6.3

optional service 10.7

optional tray 1.2 1.3, 13.1

ordering supplies 13.1

language 3.6

LED 1.5

FDI

authentication 10.7

dummy 1.4

Interrupt 1.6

Power Saver 1.6

Status 1.7

original size

FDI (Foreign Interface Device)

ordering 1.2 13.2

copying 5.2

scanning 7.8

9.3

LINE socket 1.4

Linux

problems 12.23

requirements 2.3

finisher (Stacker & Stapler)

original type

connection 1.4

copying 5.4

faxing 6.6

scanning 7.8

ordering 1.2

paper jam 12.10

front cover 1.3

13.2

9.4

originals 4.1

clearing jam 12.1

loading in the DADF 4.1

loading on the scanner glass 4.1

output options 10.3

FTP 7.7

Machine Info 10.1

Machine Setup 1.8

10.1

machine status 10.2

machine setup

general settings 10.2

Gray scan 7.9

9.4

Admin Setting 1.8

Machine Status 1.8

Macintosh

problems 12.25

requirements 2.2

Mailbox

Group

Group fax number 6.7

page numbering in copying 10.4

paper

changing the size 4.7

clearing jam 12.3

ID copy 5.5

loading in the multi-purpose tray 4.8

loading in the optional tray 4.7

loading in the tray1 4.7

paper feeding problems 12.15

setting the paper size of the tray 4.9

phonebook

creating Mailbox 6.9

deleting the data of the Mailbox 6.10

Mailbox List 6.9

Mailbox No. 6.9

Mailbox Passcode 6.9

polling 6.8

ID stamp in copying 10.4

Individual

email addresses for scanning 7.5

individual fax number 6.7

Interrupt 1.5

fax 6.6

printing a Mailbox 6.10

sending to remote Mailbox 6.10

storing the originals 6.9

Maintenance 11.1

maintenance parts 11.8

toner cartridge 11.3

memory DIMM

fax phonebook from SyncThru Web Ser-

vice 6.7

jam

polling

deleting the polling document 6.8

polling a remote fax 6.8

polling from remote Mailbox 6.8

printing the polling document 6.8

storing the originals for polling 6.8

PostScript

clearing paper from the duplex unit area

12.9

clearing paper from the exit area 12.8

clearing paper from the fuser unit 12.9

clearing paper from the multi-purpose tray

12.7

clearing paper from the optional tray 12.5

12.6

clearing paper from the stacker (finisher)

12.10

installing 14.1

message on the display screen 12.11

Mono 7.9 9.4

driver features 2.2

problems 12.22

multi-purpose tray 1.3

Power Save 3.6

Power Saver 1.5

hardware 1.5

using power save mode 3.6

print media

1.6

network

1.6

clearing paper from the tray1 12.3

clearing the original from DADF 12.1

clearing the original from scanner glass

12.2

10.3

port 1.4

requirements 3.2

guidelines 4.4

media sizes 4.4

selecting print media 4.2

specification 4.3

setting up 3.1

notification

receiving a fax in Mailbox 6.9

N-up copy 5.5

10.6

tips for avoiding paper jams 12.11

Job Status 1.5

JPEG 7.9 9.5

1.8

print/report

accounting reports 10.9

configuration report 10.9

e-mail confirmation report 10.9

Scan to Email 7.4

confirmation 10.9

Scan to Server 7.7

confirmation 10.9

scanned file format 7.9

scanning

telephone 6.4

terminal ID 10.4

TIFF 7.9 9.5

fax report 10.9 11.1

from the website 11.9

network auth. log report 10.9

network configuration 10.9

PCL font list 10.9

PS3 font list 10.9

scan report 11.1

toner cartridge 1.3

toner reorder notification 11.2

touch screen

problem solving 12.15

tray

9.5

color mode 7.8

darkness 7.9 9.4

enabling the scan kit option 10.7

erasing background 7.9 9.4

file format 7.9 9.5

original size 7.8

original type 7.8

9.4

adjusting the width and length 4.7

optional tray 1.3

tray1 1.3

scan to server confirmation 10.9

Schedule jobs report 10.9

supplies information 10.9

system report 11.1

usage page report 10.9

Printer software CD 2.1

printing 8.1

problem solving 12.15

USB memory 9.5

problems

9.3

9.4

troubleshooting 12.1

printing an email report 11.1

quality 7.9 9.4

resolution 7.8 9.3

USB

sending it via email 7.4

sending it via FTP 7.7

sending it via Network Scan Manager 7.6

sending it via SMB 7.7

solving scanning problems 12.20

USB flash memory 9.2

serial number 11.1

service center registration 10.2

shifting margin 5.8

side cover 1.3

SMB 7.7

sound 10.3

specifications 15.1

speed dial no. 6.7

Stacker 1.2

stand 1.2 1.3

staple cartridge

ordering 1.2

replacing 14.2

Start 1.5

Stop 1.5

port 1.4

USB flash memory

printing 9.5

scanning 9.2

copying 12.20

display message 12.11

faxing 12.21

Linux 12.23

Macintosh 12.25

network scanning 12.21

paper feeder 12.15

PostScript 12.22

printing 12.15

printing quality 12.17

scanning 12.20

waste toner container

replace 11.7

Windows

problems 12.22

requirements 2.2

16.1

touch screen 12.15

Windows 12.22

13.2

13.1

13.2

quality

scanning 7.9

9.4

solving the printing problem 12.17

stored documents 11.2

supplied software 2.1

supplies

browsing the supplies life 10.2

checking the supplies life 11.1

expected imaging unit life 10.3

expected toner cartridge life 10.3

management 10.3

Redial/Pause 1.5

remote code 10.4

replacing

11.5

11.3

waste toner container 11.7

replacing components

imaging unit 11.5

toner cartridge 11.4

replacing stapler 14.2

Report 10.9

ordering supplies 13.1

Supplies Management 10.3

SyncThru Web Service 11.9

email address 7.4

fax settings 6.7

SMB/FTP setting 7.7

System timeout 3.6

Resolution

faxing 6.6

scanning 7.8 9.3

Samsung Printer

Software section

SOFTWARE SECTION

CONTENTS

Chapter 1: I NSTALLING P RINTER S OFTWARE IN W INDOWS

Installing Printer Software ........................................................................................................ 5

Installing Software for Local Printing ................................................................................. 5

Installing Software for Network Printing ............................................................................. 8

Reinstalling Printer Software ................................................................................................... 11

Removing Printer Software ..................................................................................................... 12

Installing mono printer driver .................................................................................................. 12

Chapter 2: B ASIC P RINTING

Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 14

Printing to a file (PRN) .......................................................................................................... 14

Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 15

Layout Tab .................................................................................................................. 15

Paper Tab .................................................................................................................... 16

Graphics Tab ............................................................................................................... 17

Extras Tab ................................................................................................................... 18

About Tab ................................................................................................................... 18

Printer Tab .................................................................................................................. 18

Using a Favorite Setting ................................................................................................ 19

Using Help ................................................................................................................... 19

Chapter 3: A DVANCED P RINTING

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing) ..................................................... 20

Printing Posters ..................................................................................................................... 21

Printing Booklets .................................................................................................................. 21

Printing on Both Sides of Paper ............................................................................................... 22

Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document ................................................................................ 22

Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ......................................................................... 22

Using Watermarks ................................................................................................................. 23

Using an Existing Watermark ......................................................................................... 23

Creating a Watermark ................................................................................................... 23

Editing a Watermark ..................................................................................................... 23

Deleting a Watermark ................................................................................................... 23

Using Overlays ...................................................................................................................... 24

What is an Overlay? ...................................................................................................... 24

Creating a New Page Overlay ......................................................................................... 24

Using a Page Overlay .................................................................................................... 24

Deleting a Page Overlay ................................................................................................ 24

Chapter 4: U SING W INDOWS P OST S CRIPT D RIVER

Printer Settings ..................................................................................................................... 25

Advanced .................................................................................................................... 25

Using Help ................................................................................................................... 25

Chapter 5: U SING D IRECT P RINTING U TILITY

Overview Direct Printing Utility ................................................................................................ 26

Printing ................................................................................................................................ 26

From the Direct Printing Utility window ............................................................................ 26

Using the shortcut icon ................................................................................................. 26

Using the right-click menu ............................................................................................. 26

Chapter 6: S HARING THE P RINTER L OCALLY

Setting Up a Host Computer ................................................................................................... 27

Setting Up a Client Computer .................................................................................................. 27

Chapter 7: S CANNING

Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office ................................................................................ 28

Using Samsung SmarThru Office .................................................................................... 28

Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office ............................................................................ 30

Using Onscreen Help File ............................................................................................... 30

Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software ........................................................................ 30

Scanning Using the WIA Driver ................................................................................................ 30

Windows XP ................................................................................................................. 30

Windows Vista ............................................................................................................. 31

Chapter 8: U SING S MART P ANEL

Understanding Smart Panel .................................................................................................... 32

Opening the Troubleshooting Guide ......................................................................................... 33

Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings ............................................................................. 33

Chapter 9: U SING Y OUR P RINTER IN L INUX

Getting Started ..................................................................................................................... 34

Installing the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................................ 34

Installing the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................... 34

Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver ............................................................................... 35

Using the Unified Driver Configurator ....................................................................................... 36

Opening the Unified Driver Configurator .......................................................................... 36

Printers Configuration ................................................................................................... 36

Scanners Configuration ................................................................................................. 37

Ports Configuration ....................................................................................................... 37

Configuring Printer Properties ................................................................................................. 38

Printing a Document .............................................................................................................. 38

Printing from Applications .............................................................................................. 38

Printing Files ................................................................................................................ 39

Scanning a Document ............................................................................................................ 39

Using the Image Manager .............................................................................................. 40

Chapter 10: U SING Y OUR P RINTER WITH A M ACINTOSH

Installing Software ................................................................................................................ 42

Uninstalling software ............................................................................................................. 42

Setting Up the Printer ............................................................................................................ 43

For a Network-connected ............................................................................................... 43

For a USB-connected .................................................................................................... 43

Printing ................................................................................................................................ 44

Printing a Document ..................................................................................................... 44

Changing Printer Settings .............................................................................................. 44

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper .................................................................. 46

Duplex Printing ............................................................................................................ 46

Scanning .............................................................................................................................. 47

Scanning with USB ....................................................................................................... 47

Scanning with network .................................................................................................. 47

Typical Installation

Installing Printer

Software in Windows

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary

for printer operations will be installed.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer

and powered on.

This chapter includes:

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

• Installing Printer Software

• Reinstalling Printer Software

• Removing Printer Software

• Installing mono printer driver

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click Start and

then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “

letter which represents your drive and click OK

If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs

Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe

X” with the

→

NOTE: The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for

other operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows

user's guide or online help.

→

If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click

Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Continue in the User Account Control window.

Click Next.

Installing Printer Software

You can install the printer software for local printing or network

printing. To install the printer software on the computer,

perform the appropriate installation procedure depending on

the printer in use.

A printer driver is software that lets your computer

communicate with your printer. The procedure to install drivers

may differ depending on the operating system you are using.

All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning

installation.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Installing Software for Local Printing

Select Typical installation for a local printer. Click

A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer

using the printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB

or parallel cable. If your printer is attached to a network, skip

this step and go to “Installing Software for Network Printing” on

page 8.

You can install the printer software using the typical or custom

method.

NOTE: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during

the installation procedure, click

in the upper right corner of

the box to close the window, or click Cancel

Installing Printer Software in Windows

NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the

computer, the following window will appear.

Custom Installation

You can choose individual components to install.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer

and powered on.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click Start and

then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “

letter which represents your drive and click OK

If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs

Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe

X” with the

• After connecting the printer, click Next

→

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation

will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the

installation.

• The installation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and

interface in use.

→

If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click

Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Continue in the User Account Control window.

Click Next.

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to

print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test

page, select the checkbox and click Next

Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 7.

If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.

If not, click No to reprint it.

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order

to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox

and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web

site.

Otherwise, just click Finish

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Select Custom installation. Click Next

• The installation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and

interface in use.

Select the components to be installed and click Next.

Select your printer and click Next.

NOTE: You can change the desired installation folder by

clicking [Browse].

After the installation is finished, a window asking you to

print a test page appears. If you choose to print a test

page, select the checkbox and click Next

Otherwise, just click Next and skip to step 9.

If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes.

If not, click No to reprint it.

To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order

to receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox

and click Finish. You are now sent to the Samsung web

site.

NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the

computer, the following window will appear.

Otherwise, just click Finish

• After connecting the printer, click Next

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation

will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the

installation.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Select Typical installation for a network printer. Click

Installing Software for Network

Printing

When you connect your printer to a network, you must first

configure the TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have

assigned and verified the TCP/IP settings, you are ready to

install the software on each computer on the network.

You can install the printer software using the typical or custom

method.

Typical Installation

This is recommended for most users. All components necessary

for printer operations will be installed.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network

and powered on. For details about connecting to the

network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

click Next

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click Start and

then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “

letter which represents your drive and click OK

If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs

Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe

X” with the

→

If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click

Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Continue in the User Account Control window.

Click Next.

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to

refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your

printer to the network. To add the printer to the

network, enter the port name and the IP address for the

printer.

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,

print a Network Configuration page in machine.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name

manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse

button.

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please

turn off the firewall and click Update

For Windows operating system, click Start

→

Control Panel

and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.

For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking

you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user

of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from

Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding

Click Next.

checkbox(es) and click Finish

Otherwise, just click Finish

• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.

Select Custom installation. Click Next

NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Custom Installation

You can choose individual components to install and set a

specific IP address.

Make sure that the printer is connected to your network

and powered on. For details about connecting to the

network, see the supplied printer’s User’s Guide.

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.

click Next

The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

If the installation window does not appear, click Start and

then Run. Type X:\Setup.exe, replacing “

letter which represents your drive and click OK

If you use Windows Vista, click Start All programs

Accessories Run, and type X:\Setup.exe

X” with the

→

If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows Vista, click

Run Setup.exe in Install or run program field, and

click Continue in the User Account Control window.

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to

refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your

printer to the network. To add the printer to the

Installing Printer Software in Windows

network, enter the port name and the IP address for the

printer.

the network, set the printer as the default printer, and

change the port name of each printer. Click Next

To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address,

print a Network Configuration page in machine.

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name

manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse

button.

NOTE: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn

off the firewall and click Update

For Windows operating system, click Start

→

Control Panel

and start windows firewall, and set this option unactivated.

For other operating system, refer to its on-line guide.

To install this software on a server, select the Setting up

this printer on a server checkbox.

TIP: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific

network printer, click the Set IP Address button. The Set IP

Address window appears. Do as follows:

After the installation is finished, a window appears asking

you to print a test page and to register yourself as a user

of Samsung Printers in order to receive information from

Samsung. If you so desire, select the corresponding

checkbox(es) and click Finish

Otherwise, just click Finish

a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the

list.

b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the

printer manually and click Configure to set the specific IP

address for the network printer.

c. Click Next

NOTE: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t

work properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling

Printer Software” on page 11.

Select the components to be installed. After selecting the

components, the following window appears. You can also

change the printer name, set the printer to be shared on

Installing Printer Software in Windows

NOTE: If your printer is not already connected to the

computer, the following window will appear.

Reinstalling Printer Software

You can reinstall the software if installation fails.

Start Windows.

From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs

→

your printer driver name

→

Maintenance.

Select Repair and click Next

The list of printers available on the network appears.

Select the printer you want to install from the list and then

click Next

• After connecting the printer, click Next

• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click

Next, and No on the following screen. Then the installation

will start and a test page will not be printed at the end of the

installation.

• The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s

Guide may differ depending on the printer and

interface in use.

Select the components you want to reinstall and click

• If you do not see your printer on the list, click Update to

refresh the list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your

printer to the network. To add the printer to the

network, enter the port name and the IP address for the

printer.

If you installed the printer software for local printing

and you select your printer driver name, the window

asking you to print a test page appears. Do as follows:

a. To print a test page, select the check box and click

• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select

Shared Printer [UNC] and enter the shared name

manually or find a shared printer by clicking the Browse

button.

b. If the test page prints out correctly, click Yes

If it doesn’t, click No to reprint it.

You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any

item individually.

When the reinstallation is done, click Finish

Installing Printer Software in Windows

Removing Printer Software

Installing mono printer driver

This printer provides you the printer drivers with a mono driver

so you can use your printer as a monochrome printer. You must

install the mono driver on your computer. Following steps guide

you through the step by step installation process.

Start Windows.

From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs

→

your printer driver name

→

Maintenance.

Select Remove and click Next

Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer

and powered on. Or your computer and printer are

connected to the network.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive. The

CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation

window appears.

You will see a component list so that you can remove any

item individually.

Select the components you want to remove and then click

When your computer asks you to confirm your selection,

click Yes

Click Cancel.

The selected driver and all of its components are removed

from your computer.

After the software is removed, click Finish

If the confirmation window appears, click Finish.

Click Start

Select Add Printer

When Add Printer Wizard appears, click Next

→

Printers and Faxes.

Select Local printer attached to this computer, and

Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play

printer, then click Next. Go to step 13.

If your computer does not find the printer, then follow the

next step.

Select Next in the Select a Printer Port window.

In the Select a Printer Port window, select Have Disk...

10Click Browse to find a mono driver for your printer.

ex) Windows XP 32 bit

Select CD-ROM drive

→

Printer

→

PC_MONO

→

WINXP_2000_VISTA-32

11Select ***.inf file and click Open.

12Click OK in the Install From Disk window.

13Select a mono driver in the Printers field, and click Next.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

NOTE: If you have installed a mono driver before, then the

Use Existing Driver window. Select as the window explains,

and click Next. Also, depending on your computer

configuration, the printer sharing window or the print the test

page window may appear; make the appropriate selection.

14Enter your printer name, and click Next.

15Click Finish to start installing a mono printer driver.

NOTE: If your printer is connected to a network, go to

printer's Properties and select the Ports tab, then click Add

Portand Standard TCP/IP Port, and create a new port to

connect to the printer. To create a new port, follow the

procedure laid out in the wizard window.

Installing Printer Software in Windows

The basic print settings are selected within the Print

window. These settings include the number of copies and

print range.

Basic Printing

This chapter explains the printing options and common printing

tasks in Windows.

This chapter includes:

• Printing a Document

• Printing to a file (PRN)

• Printer Settings

- Layout Tab

Make sure that your

printer is selected.

- Paper Tab

- Graphics Tab

- Extras Tab

Select your printer driver from the Name drop-down

list.

- About Tab

- Printer Tab

To take advantage of the printer features provided by your

printer driver, click Properties or Preferences in the

application’s Print window. For details, see “Printer

Settings” on page 15.

- Using a Favorite Setting

- Using Help

If you see Setup Printer, or Options in your Print

window, click it instead. Then click Properties on the next

screen.

Click OK to close the printer properties window.

To start the print job, click OK or Print in the Print

window.

Printing a Document

NOTE

• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible

with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility

section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s

Guide.

Printing to a file (PRN)

You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your

purpose.

To create a file:

Check the Print to file box at the Print window.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see

an exclamation

mark or

mark. An exclamation mark

means you can select that certain option but it is not

recommended, and

mark means you cannot select that

option due to the machineís setting or environment.

The following procedure describes the general steps required

for printing from various Windows applications. The exact steps

for printing a document may vary depending on the application

program you are using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your

software application for the exact printing procedure.

Open the document you want to print.

Select Print from the File menu. The Print window is

displayed. It may look slightly different depending on your

application.

Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then

click OK.

Basic Printing

Layout Tab

The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document

appears on the printed page. The Layout Options includes

Printer Settings

Multiple Pages per Side Poster Printing and Booklet

Printing. See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more

information on accessing printer properties.

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to

access all of the printer options you need when using your

printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can

review and change the settings needed for your print job.

Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your

operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the

Properties window for Windows XP.

Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you

can view additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your

Windows User’s Guide) and the Printer tab (see “Printer T a b” on

page 18).

NOTE

• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify

in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the

software application first, and change any remaining settings

using the printer driver.

• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are

using the current program. To make your changes

permanent, make them in the Printers folder.

• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other

Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's

Guide or online help.

Paper Orientation

Paper Orientation allows you to select the direction in which

information is printed on a page.

•

Portrait prints across the width of the page, letter style.

Landscape prints across the length of the page, spreadsheet

style.

1. Click the Windows Start button.

2. Select Printers and Faxes

3. Select your printer driver icon.

4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

•

Rotate allows you to rotate the page the selected degrees.

Printing Preferences

5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

Landscape

Portrait

Layout Options

Layout Options allows you to select advanced printing options.

You can choose Multiple Pages per Side and Poster Printing

•

For details, see “Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper

(N-Up Printing)” on page 20.

•

For details, see “Printing Posters” on page 21

For details, see “Printing Booklets” on page 21

Double-sided Printing

Double-sided Printing allows you to print on both sides of

paper. If this option does not appear, your printer does

not have this feature.

•

For details, see “Printing on Both Sides of Paper” on page 22.

Basic Printing

Type

Paper Tab

Set Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from

which you want to print. This will let you get the best quality

printout. If not, print quality may not be acheived as you want.

Use the following options to set the basic paper handling

specifications when you access the printer properties. See

“Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information on

accessing printer properties.

•

Thin: Less than 19 lb (70 g/m²) thin paper.

• Thick: 24 lb to 32 lb (90~120 g/m²) thick paper.

Click the Paper tab to access various paper properties.

•

Cotton: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) cotton paper such as

Gilbert 25 % and Gilbert 100 %.

•

Plain Paper: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your

printer is monochrome and printing on the 16 lb (60 g/m2)

cotton paper.

•

Recycled Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) recycled paper.

Color Paper: 20 lb to 24 lb (75~90 g/m2) color-

backgrounded paper.

Advanced Paper Options

Page

This property allows you to print the first page using a different

paper type from the rest of the document. You can select the

paper source for the first page.

For example, load thick stock for the first page into the Multi-

purpose Tray, and plain paper into Tray n. Then, select Tray n in

the Source option and Multi-Purpose Tray in the First Page

option.

Cover

This property provides you to print a cover page using a specific

paper size and type from a specific paper source which you

selected. If you configure the options to make printing on two-

sided, the first 2 pages or the last 2 pages of document will be

used as a front or back cover.

Copies

Copies allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.

You can select 1 to 999 copies.

•

No Covers: Prints the document without covers.

Size

Front Cover: Prints the document with a front cover. The front

cover can be a blank paper or the first page in the document.

Back Cover: Prints the document with a back cover. The back

cover can be a blank paper or the last page in the document.

Front and Back Cover: Prints the document with a front

cover and a back cover. The covers can be blank papers or the

first and the last pages in the document.

Size allows you to set the size of paper you loaded in the tray.

If the required size is not listed in the Size box, click Custom

When the Custom Paper Setting window appears, set the paper

size and click OK. The setting appears in the list so that you can

select it.

•

Source

Transparency Separator

Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper tray.

Use Manual Feeder when printing on special materials like

envelopes and transparencies. You have to load one sheet at a

time into the Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray.

If the paper source is set to Auto Selection, the printer

automatically picks up print material in the following tray order:

Manual Tray or Multi-Purpose Tray, Tray n.

•

No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between

transparencies.

Printer Separator: Places the same image on the divider

sheets as printed on the transparency.

Blank Separator: Places a blank sheet between

transparencies.

Scaling Printing

Scaling Printing allows you to automatically or manually scale

your print job on a page. You can choose from None

Reduce/

Enlarge, and Fit to Page

•

For details, see “Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document” on

page 22.

For details, see “Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper

Size” on page 22.

Basic Printing

Advanced Options

Graphics Tab

Use the following Graphic options to adjust the print quality for

your specific printing needs. See “Printing a Document” on

page 14 for more information on accessing printer properties.

You can set advanced settings by clicking the Advanced

Options button.

•

Raster Compression: This option determines the

compression level of images for transferring data from a

computer to a printer. If you set this option to Maximum, the

printing speed will be high, but the printing quality will be low.

TrueType Options: This option determines what the driver

tells the printer about how to image the text in your document.

Select the appropriate setting according to the status of your

document.

Click the Graphic tab to display the properties shown below.

•

Download as Outline: When this option is selected, the

driver will download any TrueType fonts that are used in your

document not already stored (resident) on your printer. If,

after printing a document, you find that the fonts did not print

correctly, choose Download as bit image and resubmit your

print job. The Download as bit image setting is often useful

when printing Adobe. This feature is available only

when you use the PCL printer driver.

Download as Bitmap: When this option is selected, the

driver will download the font data as bitmap images.

Documents with complicated fonts, such as Korean or

Chinese, or various other fonts, will print faster in this setting.

Print as Graphics: When this option is selected, the driver

will download any fonts as graphics. When printing documents

with high graphic content and relatively few TrueType fonts,

printing performance (speed) may be enhanced in this

setting.

Quality

•

Print All Text To Black: When the Print All Text To

Black option is checked, all text in your document prints solid

black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.

Print All Text To Darken: When the Print All Text To

Darken option is checked, all text in your document is allowed

to print darker than on a normal document. Some printers do

not support this feature.

The Quality options you can select may vary depending

on your printer model. The higher the setting, the sharper the

clarity of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting also

may increase the time it takes to print a document.

Color Mode

You can choose color options. Setting to Color typically produces

the best possible print quality for color documents. If you want to

print a color document in grayscale, select Grayscale. If you

want to adjust the color options manually, select Manual and

click the Color Adjust or Color Matching button.

•

Copies Setting : In order to use this option, first you need to

set total number of copies from Paper tab. When you make

several copies, and if you want to print some copies in color and

some in grayscale, use this option and select the number of

copies in grayscale.

•

Color Adjust : You can adjust the appearance of images by

changing the settings in the Levels option.

Color Matching : You can adjust the appearance of images by

changing the settings in the Settings option.

Basic Printing

•

Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the

printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident

fonts) to print your document, rather than downloading the

fonts used in your document. Because downloading fonts takes

time, selecting this option can speed up your printing time.

When using Printer fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts

used in your document to those stored in its memory. If,

however, you use fonts in your document that are very different

from those resident in the printer, your printed output will

appear very different from what it looks like on the screen.

This feature is available only when you use the PCL

printer driver.

Extras Tab

You can select output options for your document. See “Printing

a Document” on page 14 for more information about accessing

the printer properties.

Click the Extras tab to access the following feature:

•

Save as Form for Overlay: Select Save as Form for Overlay to

save the document as a form file (C:\FORMOVER\*.FOM). Once

this option is selected, the printer driver requires the file name

and the destination path each time you print. If you want to

preset the file name and specify the path, click on the button in

the Output to area, and type the file name and specify the path.

This feature is available only when you use the PCL

printer driver.

Job Setting

Job Setting dialog allows you to select how to print or save the

printing file by using the optional HDD. Some printers do not

support this feature.

Watermark

Using Onscreen Help File

You can create a background text image to be printed on each

page of your document. For details, see “Using Watermarks” on

page 23.

• For more information about Job Setting, click

at the

top right corner of the window. The Job Setting Help

window opens and allows you to view onscreen help supplied

on the Job Setting

Overlay

Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and

letterhead paper. For details, see “Using Overlays” on page 24.

Output Options

About Tab

•

Print Subset: You can set the sequence in which the pages

Use the About tab to display the copyright notice and the

version number of the driver. If you have an Internet browser,

you can connect to the Internet by clicking on the web site icon.

See “Printing a Document” on page 14 for more information

about accessing printer properties.

print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.

Normal (1,2,3): Your printer prints all pages from the first

page to the last page.

Reverse All Pages (3,2,1): Your printer prints all pages

from the last page to the first page.

Print Odd Pages: Your printer prints only the odd numbered

pages of the document.

Print Even Pages: Your printer prints only the even

Printer Tab

If you access printer properties through the Printers folder,

you can view the Printer tab. You can set the printer

configuration.

numbered pages of the document.

Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.

Request Offset: If you expect printout-sets out of the

originals, the machine places printout-sets slightly offset from

•

The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows

OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online

help.

one another

More Options

Click the Windows Start menu.

Select Printers and Faxes

•

Information Page: Select Information Page to print a cover

sheet containing the printer name, the network user ID, job

name before printing the document. When several users send a

print job to the printer, this option allows you to easily find your

printing from the output tray.

Select your printer driver icon.

Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

Properties

Click the Printer tab and set the options.

Basic Printing

Using a Favorite Setting

The Favorites option, which is visible on each properties tab,

allows you to save the current properties settings for future

use.

To save a Favorites item:

Change the settings as needed on each tab.

Enter a name for the item in the Favorites input box.

Click Save.

When you save Favorites, all current driver settings are

saved.

To use a saved setting, select the item from the Favorites drop

down list. The printer is now set to print according to the

Favorites setting you selected.

To delete a Favorites item, select it from the list and click

Delete

You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by

selecting Printer Default from the list.

Using Help

Your printer has a help screen that can be activated by clicking

the Help button in the printer properties window. These help

screens give detailed information about the printer features

provided by the printer driver.

You can also click

from the upper right corner of the window,

and then click on any setting.

Basic Printing

Advanced Printing

This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing

tasks.

Printing Multiple Pages on One

Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)

You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet

of paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will

be reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You

can print up to 16 pages on one sheet.

NOTE

• Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

From the Layout tab, choose Multiple Pages per Side in

the Layout Type drop-down list.

Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet

(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the Pages per Side drop-down

list.

This chapter includes:

• Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up

Printing)

Select the page order from the Pages Order drop-down

list, if necessary.

• Printing Posters

• Printing Booklets

Check Print Page Border to print a border around each

page on the sheet.

Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and

type.

• Printing on Both Sides of Paper

• Printing a Reduced or Enlarged Document

• Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size

• Using Watermarks

Click OK and print the document.

• Using Overlays

Advanced Printing

Printing Posters

Printing Booklets

This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4,

9, or 16 sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets

together to form one poster-size document.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

This printer feature allows you to print your document on both

sides of the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can

be folded in half after printing to produce a booklet.

Click the Layout tab, select Poster Printing in the

Layout Type drop-down list.

Configure the poster option:

To change the print settings from your software

application, access the printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

You can select the page layout from Poster<2x2>

Poster<3x3> Poster<4x4>. If you select

From the Layout tab, choose Booklet Printing from the

Type drop-down list.

Poster<2x2>, the output will be automatically stretched

to cover 4 physical pages.

NOTE: The booklet printing option is available when Letter, A4,

Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5, or Statement

size is selected in the Size option on the Paper tab.

Click the Paper tab, and select the paper source, size, and

type.

Click OK and print the document.

Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it

easier to pasting the sheets together.

After printing, fold and staple the pages.

0.15 inches

Click the Paper tab, select the paper source, size, and

type.

Click OK and print the document. You can complete the

poster by pasting the sheets together.

Advanced Printing

Printing on Both Sides of Paper

Printing a Reduced or Enlarged

Document

You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,

decide how you want your document oriented.

You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or

smaller on the printed page.

The options are:

•

Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is

determined by the setting you’ve made on the control

panel of the printer. If this option does not appear,

your printer does not have this feature.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

From the Paper tab, select Reduce/Enlarge in the

Printing Type drop-down list.

Enter the scaling rate in the Percentage input box.

•

None

Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in

book binding.

You can also click the

button.

•

Short Edge, which is the type often used with calendars.

Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.

Click OK and print the document.

Fitting Your Document to a

Selected Paper Size

▲

Long Edge

▲

Short Edge

•

Reverse Duplex Printing, allows you to select general

print order compare to duplex print order. If this option

does not appear, your printer does not have this

feature.

This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any

selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This

can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small

document.

NOTE

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

From the Paper tab, select Fit to Page in the Printing

Type drop-down list.

• Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,

envelopes, or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the

printer may result.

• To use double-sided printing, you can use only the following

paper sizes: Letter, A4, Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,

Executive, A5, and Statement with a weight of 20~24 lbs

Select the correct size from the Output size drop-down

list.

(75~90 g/m²).

Select the paper source, size, and type in Paper Options.

Click OK and print the document.

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

From the Layout tab, select the paper orientation.

From the Double-sided Printing section, select the

binding option you want.

Click the Paper tab and select the paper source, size, and

type.

Click OK and print the document.

NOTE: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should

complete the printing job manually. The printer prints every

other page of the document first. After printing the first side of

your job, the Printing Tip window appears. Follow the on-

screen instructions to complete the printing job.

Advanced Printing

Editing a Watermark

Using Watermarks

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

Click the Extras tab and click the Edit button in the

Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks window

appears.

Select the watermark you want to edit from the Current

Watermarks list and change the watermark message and

options.

The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing

document. For example, you may want to have large gray

letters reading “DRAFT” or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally

across the first page or all pages of a document.

There are several predefined watermarks that come with the

printer, and they can be modified, or you can add new ones to

the list.

Click Update to save the changes.

Click OK until you exit the Print window.

Using an Existing Watermark

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

Click the Extras tab, and select the desired watermark

from the Watermark drop-down list. You will see the

selected watermark in the preview image.

Deleting a Watermark

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

From the Extras tab, click the Edit button in the

Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks window

appears.

Click OK and start printing.

NOTE: The preview image shows how the page will look when

it is printed.

Select the watermark you want to delete from the Current

Watermarks list and click Delete

Click OK until you exit the Print window.

Creating a Watermark

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

Click the Extras tab, and click the Edit button in the

Watermark section. The Edit Watermarks window

appears.

Enter a text message in the Watermark Message box.

You can enter up to 40 characters. The message displays

in the preview window.

When the First Page Only box is checked, the watermark

prints on the first page only.

Select watermark options.

You can select the font name, style, size, or grayscale level

from the Font Attributes section and set the angle of the

watermark from the Message Angle section.

Click Add to add a new watermark to the list.

When you have finished editing, click OK and start

printing.

To stop printing the watermark, select (No Watermark) from

the Watermark drop-down list.

Advanced Printing

Using a Page Overlay

After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with

your document. To print an overlay with a document:

Using Overlays

Create or open the document you want to print.

What is an Overlay?

To change the print settings from your software

application, access printer properties. See “Printing a

Document” on page 14.

An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard

disk drive (HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on

any document. Overlays are often used to take the place of

preprinted forms and letterhead paper. Rather than using

preprinted letterhead, you can create an overlay containing the

exact same information that is currently on your letterhead. To

print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you do not need

to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need only

tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your

document.

Dear ABC

Click the Extras tab.

Select the desired overlay from the Overlay drop-down

list box.

If the overlay file you want does not appear in the

Overlay list, click Edit button and Load Overlay, and

select the overlay file.

Regards

WORLD BEST

If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an

external source, you can also load the file when you access

the Load Overlay window.

Creating a New Page Overlay

To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay

containing your logo or image.

After you select the file, click Open. The file appears in the

Overlay List box and is available for printing. Select the

overlay from the Overlay List box.

If necessary, click Confirm Page Overlay When

Printing. If this box is checked, a message window

appears each time you submit a document for printing,

asking you to confirm your wish to print an overlay on your

document.

Create or open a document containing text or an image for

use in a new page overlay. Position the items exactly as

you wish them to appear when printed as an overlay.

To save the document as an overlay, access printer

properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 14.

Click the Extras tab, and click Edit button in the Overlay

section.

WORLD BEST

If this box is not checked and an overlay has been

selected, the overlay automatically prints with your

document.

In the Edit Overlay window, click Create Overlay.

Click OK or Yes until printing begins.

In the Create Overlay window, type a name of up to eight

characters in the File name box. Select the destination

path, if necessary. (The default is C:\Formover).

The selected overlay downloads with your print job and

prints on your document.

Click Save. The name appears on the Overlay List box.

NOTE: The resolution of the overlay document must be the

same as that of the document you will print with the overlay.

Click OK or Yes to finish creating.

The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your

computer hard disk drive.

Deleting a Page Overlay

You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.

NOTE: The overlay document size must be the same as the

documents you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay

with a watermark.

In the printer properties window, click the Extras tab.

Click the Edit button in the Overlay section.

Select the overlay you want to delete from the Overlay

List box.

Click Delete Overlay.

When a confirming message window appears, click Yes

Click OK until you exit the Print window.

Advanced Printing

Advanced

You can use advanced settings by clicking the Advanced

button.

Using Windows

PostScript Driver

If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your

system CD-ROM to print a document.

PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer

features and allow the computer to communicate with the

printer. An installation program for the PPDs is provided on the

supplied software CD-ROM.

This chapter includes:

Printer Settings

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to

access all of the printer options you need when using your

printer. When the printer properties are displayed, you can

review and change the settings needed for your print job.

Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your

operating system. This Software User’s Guide shows the

Properties window for Windows XP.

•

Paper/Output this option allows you to select the size of the

paper loaded in the tray.

Graphic this option allows you to adjust the print quality for

your specific printing needs.

Document Options this options allow you to set the PostScript

options or printer features.

Your printer driver Properties window that appears in this

User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

NOTE

• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify

in the printer driver. Change all print settings available in the

software application first, and change any remaining settings

using the printer driver.

• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are

using the current program. To make your changes

permanent, make them in the Printers folder.

Using Help

You can click

from the upper right corner of the window, and

then click on any setting.

• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other

Windows OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's

Guide or online help.

1. Click the Windows Start button.

2. Select Printers and Faxes.

3. Select your printer driver icon.

4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select

Printing Preferences.

5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.

Using Windows PostScript Driver

Using Direct Printing

Utility

Printing

There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing

Utility.

This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF

files without having to open the files.

From the Direct Printing Utility

window

CAUTION

• You can not print PDF files that are restricted to print.

Deactivate the printing restriction feature, and retry

printing.

From the Start menu select Programs or All Programs

Direct Printing Utility Direct Printing Utility

→

Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on

your desk top.

• You can not print PDF files that are restricted by a password.

Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.

The Direct Printing Utility window opens.

Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section

• Depending on how a PDF file was created, it may not be able

to be printed using the Direct Printing Utility program.

and click Browse

• Depending on the installation of Hard Disk on your printer,

PDF files can or can not be printed using the Direct

Printing Utility program.

Select the PDF file you will print and click Open

The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.

Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the

next column.

• The Direct Printing Utility program supports PDF version

1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file

to print it.

Click Print

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the shortcut icon

Overview Direct Printing Utility

Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to

the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.

Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly

to your printer without having to open the file. It sends data

through the Windows spooler using the port of the printer

driver. It only supports PDF format.

The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.

NOTE

If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,

To installing this program, you should select Custom

installation and put a check mark in this program when you

install the printer driver.

the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer

opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.

Customize the printer settings for your needs.

Click Print

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using the right-click menu

Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select Direct

Printing

The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is

added.

Select the printer you will use.

Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the

below part.

Click Print

The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.

Using Direct Printing Utility

Sharing the Printer

Locally

You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer,

which is called “host computer,” on the network.

Setting Up a Host Computer

Start Windows.

From the Start menu select Printers and Faxes

Double-click your printer driver icon

From the Printer menu, select Sharing

The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows

OS, refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online

help.

Check the Share this printer box.

Fill in the Shared Name field, and then click OK

NOTE

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with

your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of

Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

Setting Up a Client Computer

Right-click the Windows Start button and select Explore.

Select My Network Places and then right-click Search

for Computers

Fill in the IP address of host computer in Computer name

field, and click Search. (In case host computer requires

User name and Password, fill in User ID and password

of host computer account.)

Double-click Printers and Faxes

Right-click printer driver icon, select Connect

Click Yes, if the installation confirm message appears.

Sharing the Printer Locally

Scanning

Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into

digital files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the

files, display them on your web site or use them to create

projects that you can print using Samsung SmarThru software

or the WIA driver.

Scanning Using Samsung

SmarThru Office

Samsung SmarThru Office is the accompanying software for

your machine. You can use SmarThru Office to scan images

or documents from local or network scanners.

This chapter includes:

Using Samsung SmarThru Office

Follow these steps to start scanning using the SmarThru

Office:

• Scanning Using Samsung SmarThru Office

• Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software

• Scanning Using the WIA Driver

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on

and properly connected to each other.

NOTE

• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible

with your printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility

section of Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s

Guide.

• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-

ROM.

• The maximum resolution that can be achieved

depends upon various factors, including computer

speed, available disk space, memory, the size of the

image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,

depending on your system and what you are scanning,

you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,

especially using enhanced dpi.

Place your photograph or page on the document glass or

DADF (or ADF).

Once you have installed Samsung SmarThru Office, you

will see the SmarThru Office icon on your desktop.

Double-click the SmarThru Office icon.

Double-click this icon.

The SmarThru Office window opens.

Tool bar

Working area

Send to bar

•Tool bar: Allows you to use shortcut icons which activate

the certain functions such as Scan Search, etc.

Scanning

•Working area

Click Scan on the tool bar of SmarThru Office window.

SmarThru Desktop: Created within the standard

Adjust the scan settings.

Windows folder My Documents.

Sort on Disk: Files of the folders which are not

indexed will not be displayed in the Sort on Disk

section. Sort type are Date, File Types, Latest Used.

To add a folder for indexing, press Edit menu

Preferences Index

→

It may take longer time to show the added file folders

according to the computer performance and the

number of added file folders.

NOTE

• To do indexing and searching the PDF format file, you must

install Adobe Acrobat Reader 7.0.5 or higher.

• You can use indexing and searching functions using

SmarThru Office supported by Microsoft Indexing Service.

This service is supported in Windows 2000 or above.

Click to start scanning.

NOTE

Windows Folders: Allow user to navigate through all

• In Windows XP operating system, you can use SmarThru

Office launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to open

the Scan Setting window easily.

the user’s files and folders.

- The right panel: Reflects the content of a selected

folder.

•

Send to bar: Run the corresponding application directly.

Drag and drop selected files to the appropriate

application button.

• In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the

Send by E-mail: To send documents by E-mail while

working within the SmarThru Office

To send scanned images or documents by e-mail, you

must have a mail client program, like Outlook Express,

which has been set up with your e-mail account.

SmarThru icon

in the tray area of the windows taskbar

to activate the SmarThru Office launcher.

Send by FTP: To upload a document file to server

while working within the SmarThru Office

Send by Fax: To send documents by Local or Network

fax machine while working within the SmarThru

Scan Setting lets you use the following services:

Office

•Select Scanner: Select the Local or Network scanner.

- Local Scan: After scanning with parallel port or USB

port, you can store the scanned output in image or

document file.

- Network Scan: After scanning via network, you can

store the scanned output in JPEG, TIFF, or pdf file.

To use network scanner, your computer should install

the Network Scan Manager and register the scanner

within that program. Refer to Scanning chapter in

user's guide.

•Scan Settings: Allows you to customize settings for

Image type, Resolution, Scan Size, Paper Source.

•Scan To: Allows you to customize settings for File Name,

File Format, OCR Language.

To start scanning, click Scan.

NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, click Cancel

Scanning

Uninstalling Samsung SmarThru Office

Scanning Using the WIA Driver

NOTE: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all

Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition

(WIA) driver for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard

components provided by Microsoft Windows XP and works

with digital cameras and scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the

WIA driver allows you to scan and easily manipulate images

without using additional software.

applications are closed on your computer.

From the Start menu, select Programs

Select SmarThru Office, and then select Uninstall

SmarThru Office

When your computer asks you to confirm, read the

statement and click OK

Click Finish

NOTE: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Vista with

USB port.

Windows XP

Using Onscreen Help File

For more information about SmarThru, click

corner of the window. The SmarThru Help window opens and

allows you to view onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru

program.

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

at the top right

Place a single document face down on the document

glass.

From the Start menu on your desktop window, select

Settings

Control Panel, and then Scanners and

Cameras

Double click your scanner driver icon. The Scanner and

Camera Wizard launches.

Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to

see how your preferences affect the picture.

Scanning Process with TWAIN-

enabled Software

Click Next.

If you want to scan documents using other software, you will

need to use TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe

Photoshop. The first time you scan with your machine, select it

as your TWAIN source in the application you use.

Enter a picture name, and select a file format and

destination to save the picture.

Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it

is copied to your computer.

The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on

and properly connected to each other.

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

Place a single document face down on the document

glass.

Open an application, such as PhotoDeluxe or Photoshop.

Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.

Scan and save your scanned image.

NOTE: You need to follow the program’s instructions for

acquiring an image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the

application.

Scanning

Windows Vista

Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

Click Start

Scanners and Cameras

→

Control Panel

→

Hardware and Sound

→

Click on Scan a document or picture. Then Windows

Fax and Scan application is opened automatically.

NOTE

• To view scanners, user can click on View scanners and

cameras

•

If there is not Scan a document or picture, open the MS paint

program and click From Scanner or Camera... on File menu.

Click New Scan and then scan driver is opened.

Choose your scanning preferences and click Preview to

see your preferences affect the picture.

Click Scan.

NOTE: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the Cancel

button on the Scanner and Camera Wizard.

Scanning

If you are a Windows user, from the Start menu, select

Programs or All Programs your printer driver name

→

Using Smart Panel

Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the

status of the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s

settings. Smart Panel is installed automatically when you

install the printer software.

Smart Panel

NOTE:

• If you have already installed more than one Samsung

printer, first select the printer model you want in order to

use the corresponding Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows

or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel icon and

select your printer name

NOTE:

• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this

Software User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or

Operating System in use.

• To use this program, you need:

- Windows. To check for windows operating system(s) that

are compatible with your printer, refer to Printer

Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the

printer, the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s)

and various other information. You can also change settings.

- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher

- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with

your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer

User’s Guide.

- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation

in HTML Help.

• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can

check the supplied CD-ROM.

Understanding Smart Panel

If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears

automatically, showing the error.

Toner Level

You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner

cartridge(s). The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s)

shown in the above window may differ depending on the printer in

use. Any printers do not have this feature.

You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the

Smart Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or

Notification Area (in Linux). You can also click it on the status

bar (in Mac OS X).

Buy Now

You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.

Double-click this icon in Windows.

Troubleshooting Guide

You can view Help to solve problems.

Printer Setting

If you connect your printer to a network, the SyncThru

Web Service window appears instead of the Printer

Settings Utility window.

Click this icon in Mac OS X.

Driver Setting (Only for Windows)

You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to

access all of the printer options you need for using your

printer. For details, See “Printer Settings” on page 15.

Click this icon in Linux.

Using Smart Panel

Opening the Troubleshooting Guide

Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for

error status problems.

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the

Smart Panel icon and select Troubleshooting Guide

Changing the Smart Panel

Program Settings

Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the

Smart Panel icon and select Options

Select the settings you want from the Options window.

Using Smart Panel

Using Your Printer in

Linux

Installing the Unified Linux

Driver

You can use your machine in a Linux environment.

Installing the Unified Linux Driver

Make sure that you connect your machine to your

computer. Turn both the computer and the machine on.

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in

root in the Login field and enter the system password.

This chapter includes:

• Getting Started

• Installing the Unified Linux Driver

• Using the Unified Driver Configurator

• Configuring Printer Properties

• Printing a Document

NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the

printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

• Scanning a Document

Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will

automatically run.

If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the

icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal

screen appears, type in:

Getting Started

If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to

mount is /mnt/cdrom,

[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/

cdrom

[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux

[root@localhost root]#./install.sh

The supplied CD-ROM provides you with Samsung’s Unified

Linux Driver package for using your machine with a Linux

computer.

Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and

scanner drivers, providing the ability to print documents and

scan images. The package also delivers powerful applications

for configuring your machine and further processing of the

scanned documents.

If you still failed to run the CD-ROM, type the followings

in sequence:

[root@localhost root]#umount /dev/hdc

[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/

cdrom

After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver

package allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via

fast ECP parallel ports and USB simultaneously.

The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the

same local or network machine devices, sent by e-mail,

uploaded to an FTP site, or transferred to an external OCR

system.

NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you

have an autorun software package installed and configured.

The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and

flexible installation program. You don't need to search for

additional components that might be necessary for the Unified

Linux Driver software: all required packages will be carried onto

your system and installed automatically; this is possible on a

wide set of the most popular Linux clones.

When the welcome screen appears, click Next.

Using Your Printer in Linux

When the installation is complete, click Finish.

Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver

When the Administrator Login window appears, type in

root in the Login field and enter the system password.

NOTE: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the

printer software. If you are not a super user, ask your system

administrator.

Insert the printer software CD-ROM. The CD-ROM will

automatically run.

If the CD-ROM does not automatically run, click the

icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal

screen appears, type in:

If the CD-ROM is secondary master and the location to

mount is /mnt/cdrom,

The installation program has added the Unified Driver

Configurator desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver

group to the system menu for your convenience. If you

have any difficulties, consult the onscreen help that is

available through your system menu or can otherwise be

called from the driver package windows applications,

such as Unified Driver Configurator or Image

[root@localhost root]#mount -t iso9660 /dev/hdc /mnt/

cdrom

[root@localhost root]#cd /mnt/cdrom/Linux

[root@localhost root]#./uninstall.sh

Manager

NOTE: The installation program runs automatically if you

have an autorun software package installed and configured.

NOTE: Installing the driver in the text mode:

• If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the

driver installation, you have to use the driver in the text

mode.

• Follow the step 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./

install.sh, then follow the instruction on the terminal screen.

Then the installation completes.

Click Uninstall

Click Next

• When you wan to uninstall the driver, follow the installation

instruction above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./

uninstall.sh on the terminal screen.

Click Finish.

Using Your Printer in Linux

Printers Configuration

Printers configuration has the two tabs: Printers and Classes

Using the Unified Driver

Configurator

Printers Tab

You can see the current system’s printer configuration by

clicking on the printer icon button on the left side of the Unified

Driver Configurator window.

Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for

configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device

combines the printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver

Configurator provides options logically grouped for printer and

scanner functions. There is also a special MFP port option

responsible for the regulation of access to an MFP printer and

scanner via a single I/O channel.

Switches to Printer

configuration.

After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver

Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.

Shows all of the

installed printer.

Opening the Unified Driver

Configurator

Shows the status,

model name and

URI of your printer.

Double-click Unified Driver Configurator on the

desktop.

You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select

Samsung Unified Driver and then Unified Driver

Configurator

Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the

corresponding configuration window.

You can use the following printer control buttons:

•

Refresh: renews the available printers list.

Add Printer: allows you to add a new printer.

Remove Printer: removes the selected printer.

Printers Configuration button

Set as Default: sets the current printer as a default

printer.

Scanners Configuration button

(for MFP device only)

•

Stop/Start: stops/starts the printer.

Test: allows you to print a test page to check if the

machine is working properly.

Ports Configuration button

•

Properties: allows you to view and change the printer

properties. For details, see page 38.

You can use the onscreen help by clicking Help

After changing the configurations, click Exit to close the

Unified Driver Configurator.

Using Your Printer in Linux

Classes Tab

The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.

Ports Configuration

In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check

the status of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy

state when its owner is terminated for any reason.

Shows all of the

printer classes.

Switches to

ports

configuration.

Shows all of the

available ports.

Shows the status of the

class and the number of

printers in the class.

Shows the port type,

device connected to

the port and status

•

Refresh : Renews the classes list.

Add Class... : Allows you to add a new printer class.

Remove Class : Removes the selected printer class.

•

Refresh : Renews the available ports list.

Release port : Releases the selected port.

Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners

Scanners Configuration

In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices,

view a list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device

properties, and scan images.

Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the

parallel port or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more

than one device (printer and scanner), it is necessary to

organize proper access of “consumer” applications to these

devices via the single I/O port.

The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an

appropriate port sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung

printer and scanner drivers. The drivers address their devices

via so-called MFP ports. The current status of any MFP port can

be viewed via the Ports Configuration. The port sharing

prevents you from accessing one functional block of the MFP

device, while another block is in use.

Switches to

Scanners

configuration.

Shows all of the

installed scanners.

When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is

strongly recommended you do this with the assistance of an

Unified Driver Configurator. In this case you will be asked to

choose I/O port for the new device. This choice will provide the

most suitable configuration for MFP’s functionality. For MFP

scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner drivers

automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.

Shows the vendor,

model name and type

of your scanner.

•

Properties... : Allows you to change the scan properties

and scan a document. See page 39.

Using Your Printer in Linux

Configuring Printer Properties

Printing a Document

Using the properties window provided by the Printers

configuration, you can change the various properties for your

machine as a printer.

Printing from Applications

There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to

print from using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You

can print on your machine from any such application.

Open the Unified Driver Configurator.

If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.

Select your machine on the available printers list and click

From the application you are using, select Print from the

File menu.

Properties

The Printer Properties window opens.

Select Print directly using lpr

In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your

machine from the Printer list and click Properties

Click.

The following five tabs display at the top of the window:

•

General: allows you to change the printer location and

name. The name entered in this tab displays on the

printer list in Printers configuration.

•

Connection: allows you to view or select another port. If

you change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice

versa while in use, you must re-configure the printer port

in this tab.

Change the printer and print job properties.

•

Driver: allows you to view or select another printer

driver. By clicking Options, you can set the default

device options.

Jobs: shows the list of print jobs. Click Cancel job to

cancel the selected job and select the Show completed

jobs check box to see previous jobs on the job list.

Classes: shows the class that your printer is in. Click

Add to Class to add your printer to a specific class or

click Remove from Class to remove the printer from the

selected class.

Click OK to apply the changes and close the Printer

Properties Window.

Using Your Printer in Linux

The following four tabs display at the top of the window.

•

General - allows you to change the paper size, the paper

type, and the orientation of the documents, enables the

duplex feature, adds start and end banners, and changes

the number of pages per sheet.

Scanning a Document

You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator

window.

•Text - allows you to specify the page margins and set the

Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your

desktop.

text options, such as spacing or columns.

•

Graphics - allows you to set image options that are used

when printing images/files, such as color options, image

size, or image position.

Click the

button to switch to Scanners Configuration.

Select the scanner on the list.

•Device: allows you to set the print resolution, paper

source, and destination.

Click Apply to apply the changes and close the Properties

window.

Click OK in the LPR GUI window to start printing.

The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the

status of your print job.

Click your

scanner.

To abort the current job, click Cancel

Printing Files

You can print many different types of files on the Samsung

machine device using the standard CUPS way - directly from

the command line interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do

that. But the drivers package replaces the standard lpr tool by

a much more user-friendly LPR GUI program.

To print any document file:

Type lpr <file_name> from the Linux shell command

line and press Enter. The LPR GUI window appears.

When you have only one MFP device and it is connected

to the computer and turned on, your scanner appears on

the list and is automatically selected.

When you type only lpr and press Enter, the Select

file(s) to print window appears first. Just select any files

If you have two or more scanners attached to your

computer, you can select any scanner to work at any

time. For example, while acquisition is in progress on the

first scanner, you may select the second scanner, set the

device options and start the image acquisition

simultaneously.

you want to print and click Open

In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list,

and change the printer and print job properties.

For details about the properties window, see page 38.

Click OK to start printing.

Click Properties.

Load the document to be scanned face up into the ADF

(Automatic Document Feeder) or face down on the

document glass.

Click Preview in the Scanner Properties window.

Using Your Printer in Linux

The document is scanned and the image preview appears

in the Preview Pane.

10When you are finished, click Save on the toolbar.

11Select the file directory where you want to save the image

and enter the file name.

12Click Save.

Adding Job Type Settings

You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later

scanning.

To save a new Job Type setting:

Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.

Click Save As

Enter the name for your setting.

Click OK

Drag the pointer to

set the image area

to be scanned.

Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down

list.

To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:

Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-

down list.

Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan

Area sections.

The next time you open the Scanner Properties window,

the saved setting is automatically selected for the scan

job.

•Image Quality: allows you to select the color

composition and the scan resolution for the image.

To delete a Job Type setting:

•

Scan Area: allows you to select the page size. The

Advanced button enables you to set the page size

manually.

Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type

drop-down list.

Click Delete

If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings,

select from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about

the preset Job Type settings, see page 40.

The setting is deleted from the list

You can restore the default setting for the scan options

Using the Image Manager

The Image Manager application provides you with menu

commands and tools to edit your scanned image.

by clicking Default

When you have finished, click Scan to start scanning.

The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window

to show you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning,

click Cancel

The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager

tab.

Use these tools to

edit the image.

If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar.

For further details about editing an image, see page 40.

Using Your Printer in Linux

You can use the following tools to edit the image:

Tools Function

Saves the image.

Cancels your last action.

Restores the action you canceled.

Allows you to scroll through the image.

Crops the selected image area.

Zooms the image out.

Zooms the image in.

Allows you to scale the image size; you can

enter the size manually, or set the rate to

scale proportionally, vertically, or

horizontally.

Allows you to rotate the image; you can

select the number of degrees from the drop-

down list.

Allows you to flip the image vertically or

horizontally.

Allows you to adjust the brightness or

contrast of the image, or to invert the

image.

Shows the properties of the image.

For further details about the Image Manager application, refer

to the onscreen help.

Using Your Printer in Linux

10Select Typical installation for a local printer and then

click OK

11After the installation is finished, click Quit.

Using Your Printer with

a Macintosh

NOTE

Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB

interface or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When

you print a file from a Macintosh computer, you can use the

PostScript driver by installing the PPD file.

• If you have installed scan driver, click Restart

• After the installation is finished, see “Setting Up the Printer”

on page 43

NOTE: Some printers do not support a network

interface. Make sure that your printer supports a

network interface by referring to Printer Specifications

in your Printer User’s Guide.

Uninstalling software

Uninstall is required if you are upgrading the software, or if

installation fails.

This chapter includes:

• Installing Software

• Uninstalling software

• Setting Up the Printer

• Printing

Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.

Turn on your computer and printer.

Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the

CD-ROM drive.

Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your

Macintosh desktop.

• Scanning

Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

Double-click the Installer icon.

Enter the password and click OK

The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue

Select Uninstall and click Uninstall

The message which warns all application will close on your

computer appears, Click Continue

10When the uninstallation is done, click Quit.

Installing Software

The CD-ROM that came with your printer provides you with the

PPD file that allows you to use the CUPS driver or Apple

LaserWriter driver (only available when you use a printer

which supports the PostScript driver), for printing on a

Macintosh computer.

Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a

Macintosh computer.

Make sure that you connect your printer to the computer.

Turn on your computer and printer.

Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the

CD-ROM drive.

Double-click CD-ROM icon that appears on your

Macintosh desktop.

Double-click the MAC_Installer folder.

Double-click the Installer icon.

Enter the password and click OK

The Samsung Installer window opens. Click Continue

Select Easy Install and click Install Easy Install is

recommended for most users. All components necessary

for printer operations will be installed.

If you select Custom Install, you can choose individual

components to install.

The message which warns all application will close on your

computer appears, Click Continue

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

For a USB-connected

Setting Up the Printer

Mac OS 10.1 or higher

Set up for your printer will be different depending on which

cable you use to connect the printer to your computer—the

network cable or the USB cable.

Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42

to install the PPD file on your computer.

Open the Applications folder

Setup Utility

•For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the

→

Utilities, and Print

For a Network-connected

Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax

NOTE Some printers do not support a network interface.

Click Add on the Printer List

Before connecting your printer, make sure that your

printer supports a network interface by referring to Printer

Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.

•For MAC OS 10.5, press the “

window will pop up.

” icon then a display

For MAC OS 10.3, select the USB tab.

•For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the

USB connection.

Mac OS 10.1 or higher

•For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the USB

connection.

Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 42

to install the PPD file on your computer.

Select your printer name.

Open the Applications folder

Setup Utility

•For MAC OS 10.5, open System Preferences from the

→

Utilities, and Print

For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer

name in Model Name

Applications folder, and click Printer & Fax

•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name

Click Add on the Printer List

•For MAC OS 10.5, press the “

window will pop up.

+” icon then a display

in Model

•For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select Select a driver to use... and your printer name

For MAC OS 10.3, select the Rendezvous tab.

in Print Using

•For MAC OS 10.4, click Default Browser and find the

Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the

default printer.

Bonjour

•For MAC OS 10.5, click Default and find the Bonjour

Click Add.

The name of your machine appears on the list. Select

SEC000xxxxxxxxx from the printer box, where the

xxxxxxxxx varies depending on your machine.

For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select Samsung in Printer Model and your printer

name in Model Name

•For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select Samsung in Print Using and your printer name

in Model

•For MAC OS 10.5, if Auto Select does not work properly,

select Select a driver to use... and your printer name

in Print Using

Your machine appears on the Printer List and is set as the

default printer.

Click Add.

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Changing Printer Settings

You can use advanced printing features when using your

printer.

Printing

From your Macintosh application, select Print from the File

menu. The printer name which appears in the printer properties

window may differ depending on the printer in use. Except for

the name, the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

NOTE

• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in

this User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer in use.

However the composition of the printer properties window is

similar.

• You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-

ROM.

NOTE: The setting options may differ depending on printers

and Macintosh OS version.

Layout

Printing a Document

The Layout tab provides options to adjust how the document

appears on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on

one sheet of paper. Select Layout from the Presets drop-down

list to access the following features.

When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer

software setting in each application you use. Follow these steps

to print from a Macintosh.

Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want

to print.

Open the File menu and click Page Setup (Document

Setup in some applications).

Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other

options and click OK

Make sure that your

printer is selected.

Mac OS 10.4

•

Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many

pages printed on one page. For details, see "Printing

Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper" on the next

column.

•Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction

on a page as like the examples on UI.

Mac OS 10.3

Open the File menu and click Print

Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which

pages you want to print.

Click Print when you finish setting the options.

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Graphics

Printer Features

The Graphics tab provides options for selecting

Resolution(Quality) and Color Mode. Select Graphics

form the Presets' drop-down list to access the graphic

features.

This tab provides options for selecting the paper type and

adjusting print quality. Select Printer Features from the

Presets' drop-down list to access the following features:

SMac OS 10.4

Mac OS 10.4

•

Reverse Duplex Printing: Allows you to select general

print order compare to duplex print order. If this option

does not appear, your printer does not have this

feature.

•

Resolution(Quality): You can select the printing

resolution. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity

of printed characters and graphics. The higher setting

also may increase the time it takes to print a document.

•

Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print

job to any selected paper size regardless of the digital

document size. This can be useful when you want to

check fine details on a small document.

•

Color Mode: You can set the color options. Setting to

Color typically produces the best possible print quality

for color documents. If you want to print a color

•

RGB Color: This setting determines how colors are

rendered. Standard is the most widely used setting

which the color tone of this mode is the closest to that of

standard monitor (sRGB Monitor). Vivid mode is

appropriate for printing presentation data and charts.

The color tone of Vivid mode produces more Vivid color

images than that of Standard mode. Device mode is best

used for printing fine lines, small characters and color

drawings. The color tone of Device mode may be

different from that of monitor, the pure toner colors are

used for printing Cyan, Magenta and Yellow colors.

document in grayscale, select Grayscale

Paper

Set Paper Type to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray

from which you want to print. This will let you get the best

quality printout. If you load a different type of print material,

select the corresponding paper type.

Mac OS 10.4

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

of Paper

You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper.

This feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.

Duplex Printing

You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the

duplex mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your

finished document. The binding options are:

•

Long-Edge Binding: Which is the conventional layout used in

book binding.

From your Macintosh application, select Print from the

File menu.

•

Short-Edge Binding: Which is the type often used with

calendars.

Select Layout

From your Macintosh application, select Print from the

File menu.

Select the Layout

Mac OS 10.3

Select the number of pages you want to print on one sheet

of paper on the Pages per Sheet drop-down list.

Select the page order from the Layout Direction option.

Mac OS 10.3

To print a border around each page on the sheet, select

the option you want from the Border drop-down list.

Click Print, and the printer prints the selected number of

pages on one side of each page.

Select a binding orientation from Two Sided Printing

option.

Click Print and the printer prints on both sides of the

paper.

CAUTION If you have selected duplex printing and

then try to print multiple copies of a document, the

printer may not print the document in the way you

want. In case of "Collated copy" , if your document has

odd pages, the last page of the first copy and the first

page of the next copy will be printed on the front and

back of one sheet. In case of "Uncollated copy", the

same page will be printed on the front and back of one

sheet. Therefore, if you need multiple copies of a

document and you want those copies on both sides of

the paper, you must print them one at a time, as

separate print jobs

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

For MAC OS X 10.5:

Make sure that Connected checkbox is checked beside

Scanning

your machine in Bonjour Devices

If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the MAC OS X

10.4 procedure above.

You can scan docoments using Image Capture program.

Macintosh OS offers Image Capture program.

Set the scan options on this program.

Scan and save your scanned image.

Scanning with USB

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on

and properly connected to each other.

NOTE

• If you want to scan via the DADF, use TWAIN-comliant

softwares.

• For more information about using Image Capture, please

refer to the Image Capture’s help.

• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as

Adobe Photoshop.

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).

Start Applications and click Image Capture

• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant

NOTE: If No Image Capture device connected message

appears, disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the

problem persists, please refer to the Image Capture’s help.

softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.

• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update

Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates

propery in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or

higher.

Set the scan options on this program.

Scan and save your scanned image.

NOTE

• For more information about using Image Capture, please

refer to the Image Capture’s help.

• If you want to scan via the DADF, use TWAIN-comliant

softwares.

• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant softwares, such as

Adobe Photoshop.

• Scan process differ according to TWAIN-compliant

softwares. Please refer to the user’s guide of the software.

• If scanning does not operate in Image Capture, update

Mac OS to the latest version. Image Capture operates

propery in Mac OS 10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS 10.4.7 or

higher.

Scanning with network

Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on.

Place a single document face down on the document glass.

OR load the document(s) face up into the ADF (or DADF).

Start Applications and click Image Capture.

Click Devices and click Browse Devices

For MAC OS X 10.4:

Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure

that Use TWAIN software checkbox is checked, and click

Connect

Using Your Printer with a Macintosh

SOFTWARE SECTION

INDEX

installing

Linux software 34

print 39

paper source, set 39

Windows 16

paper tray, set

copy 26

paper type, set

print 39

advanced printing, use 20

Layout properties, set

Windows 15

booklet printing 21

poster, print 21

PostScript driver

installing 25

Linux

driver, install 34

printer properties 38

printing 38

canceling

scan 31

Color 17

document 14

fit to page 22

from Macintosh 44

from Windows 14

N-up

Macintosh 46

Windows 20

overlay 24

scanning 39

Macintosh

driver

document, print

Macintosh 44

install 42

uninstall 42

printing 44

Windows 14

poster 23

PRN 14

scaling 22

double-sided printing 22

scanning 47

setting up the printer 43

MFP driver, install

Linux 34

watermark 23

print resolution 39

printer driver, install

Linux 34

Extras properties, set 18

printer properties

Linux 38

printer properties, set

Macintosh 44

Windows 15, 25

printer resolution, set

Windows 17

favorites settings, use 19

n-up printing

Macintosh 46

Windows 20

Graphics 17

Graphics properties, set 17

printer software

install

orientation, print 39

Windows 15

overlay

Macintosh 42

Windows

uninstall

create 24

delete 24

print 24

help, use 19, 25

Macintosh 42

Windows 12

printing

install

booklets 21

double-sided 22

from Linux 38

printer driver

Macintosh 42

Paper properties, set 16

paper size, set 16

Windows

resolution

printing 39

scanning

Linux 39

SmarThru 28

TWAIN 30

WIA driver 30

scanning from Macintosh 47

setting

darkness 17

favorites 19

image mode 17

resolution

Windows 17

true-type option 17

software

install

Macintosh 42

Windows

reinstall

Windows 11

system requirements

Macintosh 42

uninstall

Macintosh 42

Windows 12

status monitor, use 32

TWAIN, scan 30

uninstall, software

Macintosh 42

Windows 12

uninstalling

MFP driver

Linux 35

watermark

create 23

delete 23

edit 23

print 23

WIA, scan 30

Ver. 5.00

Sunbeam Sca062rwb1 User Manual
Soleus Air Gm Cac 12se User Manual
Soleus Air Gl Pac 08e4 User Manual
Soleus Air Air Conditioner Sg Ttw 09hc 26 User Manual
Sanyo Cm1972 User Manual
Samsung Aw1291m User Manual
Samsung Aqt24w6wb User Manual
Olympus Battery Cradle Et Ck30 User Manual
AT&T TL90077 User Manual
ACER ALLEGRO M310 User Manual